Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Convex Optimization

197 missions · 131 completed

Missions

Open66Completed131All197
Algorithmic Game TheoryMachine LearningOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Blackwell Approachability and No-Regret Learning are Equivalent 3: An Efficient Forecaster Whose (ℓ1, ε)-Calibration Rate Is at Most √(2/(εT))Research Paper

Calibrated forecasting

A forecaster announces, each day, a probability that it will rain; afterwards nature reveals whether it did. The forecaster is calibrated if, on the days on which it announced roughly 30%, it rained roughly 30% of the time, and likewise for every other announced value. Calibration is a minimal consistency requirement for probabilistic forecasts, used in meteorology, in the evaluation of probabilistic classifiers, and in game theory, where calibrated forecasts of the opponents' play lead to correlated equilibrium (Foster and Vohra, 1997).

Calibration is achievable even against an adversary who chooses the outcomes, provided the forecaster randomizes. Timeline:

  • 1998. Foster and Vohra construct an asymptotically calibrated randomized forecaster against an arbitrary outcome sequence.
  • 1999. Foster reduces calibration to Blackwell's approachability theorem by exhibiting, for each halfspace, a forecast that keeps the payoff inside it.
  • 2009. Mannor and Stoltz give an approachability-based calibration procedure concurrently with the paper below.
  • 2011. Abernethy, Bartlett and Hazan prove that Blackwell approachability and no-regret online linear optimization are equivalent, and use the equivalence to obtain an efficient calibrated forecaster: O(log⁡1/ε)O(\log 1/\varepsilon)O(log1/ε) time per round and calibration rate O(1/εT)O(1/\sqrt{\varepsilon T})O(1/εT​).

This mission formalizes the last result, Theorem 22 of the 2011 paper, in the explicit form given by its proof.

Setting

Fix a positive integer mmm and the grid width ε=1/m\varepsilon = 1/mε=1/m. Each round t=1,…,Tt = 1, \dots, Tt=1,…,T the forecaster chooses a probability vector wtw_twt​ in the simplex Δm+1\Delta_{m+1}Δm+1​ over the grid indices i=0,…,mi = 0, \dots, mi=0,…,m, draws it∼wti_t \sim w_tit​∼wt​ and announces pt=it/mp_t = i_t/mpt​=it​/m. Nature then reveals yt∈{0,1}y_t \in \{0, 1\}yt​∈{0,1}.

Vectors live in Rm+1\mathbb R^{m+1}Rm+1 with the Euclidean norm ∥⋅∥2\|\cdot\|_2∥⋅∥2​. The ℓ₁ norm is ∥x∥1=∑i∣xi∣\|x\|_1 = \sum_i |x_i|∥x∥1​=∑i​∣xi​∣, the ℓ₁ ball is B1(r)={y:∥y∥1≤r}B_1(r) = \{y : \|y\|_1 \le r\}B1​(r)={y:∥y∥1​≤r}, and the unit cube is B∞(1)={θ:∣θi∣≤1 for all i}B_\infty(1) = \{\theta : |\theta_i| \le 1 \text{ for all } i\}B∞​(1)={θ:∣θi​∣≤1 for all i}.

The calibration game (11) has payoff

u(w,y)=(w(0)(y−0m), w(1)(y−1m), …, w(m)(y−1))∈Rm+1.u(w, y) = \Bigl(w(0)\bigl(y - \tfrac0m\bigr),\ w(1)\bigl(y - \tfrac1m\bigr),\ \dots,\ w(m)(y - 1)\Bigr) \in \mathbb R^{m+1}.u(w,y)=(w(0)(y−m0​), w(1)(y−m1​), …, w(m)(y−1))∈Rm+1.

The (ℓ1,ε)(\ell_1, \varepsilon)(ℓ1​,ε)-calibration rate (Definition 19) of the announced forecasts is max⁡{0,∑i=0m∣1T∑t=1TI[pt=i/m](i/m−yt)∣−ε/2}\max\{0, \sum_{i=0}^m |\frac1T\sum_{t=1}^T \mathbb I[p_t = i/m](i/m - y_t)| - \varepsilon/2\}max{0,∑i=0m​∣T1​∑t=1T​I[pt​=i/m](i/m−yt​)∣−ε/2}. Replacing each indicator by its expectation wt(i)w_t(i)wt​(i) gives the rate of the forecast distributions,

CˉTε=max⁡{0, ∑i=0m∣1T∑t=1Twt(i)(im−yt)∣−ε2},\bar C^\varepsilon_T = \max\Bigl\{0,\ \sum_{i=0}^m \Bigl|\frac1T \sum_{t=1}^T w_t(i)\Bigl(\frac im - y_t\Bigr)\Bigr| - \frac\varepsilon2\Bigr\},CˉTε​=max{0, i=0∑m​​T1​t=1∑T​wt​(i)(mi​−yt​)​−2ε​},

which is max⁡{0,∥uˉT∥1−ε/2}\max\{0, \|\bar u_T\|_1 - \varepsilon/2\}max{0,∥uˉT​∥1​−ε/2} for the average payoff uˉT=1T∑tu(wt,yt)\bar u_T = \frac1T\sum_t u(w_t, y_t)uˉT​=T1​∑t​u(wt​,yt​).

The forecaster is Algorithm 5. It keeps a point θt\theta_tθt​ in the cube, starting from θ1=0\theta_1 = 0θ1​=0 with w1w_1w1​ arbitrary. After round ttt it takes a projected gradient step (Algorithm 4, online gradient descent) against the loss vector ft=−u(wt,yt)f_t = -u(w_t, y_t)ft​=−u(wt​,yt​):

θt+1=ΠB∞(1)(θt+η u(wt,yt)),\theta_{t+1} = \Pi_{B_\infty(1)}\bigl(\theta_t + \eta\, u(w_t, y_t)\bigr),θt+1​=ΠB∞​(1)​(θt​+ηu(wt​,yt​)),

where Π\PiΠ is the Euclidean projection. It then sets wt+1w_{t+1}wt+1​ to the output of the oracle Algorithm 3 on θt+1\theta_{t+1}θt+1​, which puts weight on at most two adjacent grid points where θ\thetaθ changes sign.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 22 in the form (14)

For m≥1m \ge 1m≥1, T≥1T \ge 1T≥1, every outcome sequence y1,…,yT∈{0,1}y_1, \dots, y_T \in \{0, 1\}y1​,…,yT​∈{0,1} and every run of Algorithm 5 with η=(m+1)/T\eta = \sqrt{(m+1)/T}η=(m+1)/T​,

CˉTε≤2εT.\bar C^\varepsilon_T \le \sqrt{\frac{2}{\varepsilon T}}.CˉTε​≤εT2​​.

This is the bound CTε≤GD/TC^\varepsilon_T \le GD/\sqrt TCTε​≤GD/T​ of display (14) with the paper's constant G=2G = \sqrt 2G=2​.

Milestones

  1. Claim 1 (proof): min⁡∥y∥1≤ε/2∥x−y∥1=max⁡{0,−ε/2+∥x∥1}\min_{\|y\|_1 \le \varepsilon/2}\|x - y\|_1 = \max\{0, -\varepsilon/2 + \|x\|_1\}min∥y∥1​≤ε/2​∥x−y∥1​=max{0,−ε/2+∥x∥1​}.
  2. Display (13): for ∥x∥1>ε/2\|x\|_1 > \varepsilon/2∥x∥1​>ε/2, also =−ε/2−min⁡∥θ∥∞≤1⟨−x,θ⟩= -\varepsilon/2 - \min_{\|\theta\|_\infty \le 1}\langle -x, \theta\rangle=−ε/2−min∥θ∥∞​≤1​⟨−x,θ⟩.
  3. Algorithm 3: for every θ\thetaθ in the cube there is an output w∈Δm+1w \in \Delta_{m+1}w∈Δm+1​, and every output satisfies ⟨u(w,y),θ⟩≤ε/2\langle u(w, y), \theta\rangle \le \varepsilon/2⟨u(w,y),θ⟩≤ε/2 for all y∈[0,1]y \in [0, 1]y∈[0,1].
  4. Display (12): under that guarantee, max⁡{0,∥uˉT∥1−ε/2}≤1T(∑t⟨−ut,θt⟩−min⁡θ∈B∞(1)∑t⟨−ut,θ⟩)\max\{0, \|\bar u_T\|_1 - \varepsilon/2\} \le \frac1T\bigl(\sum_t \langle -u_t, \theta_t\rangle - \min_{\theta \in B_\infty(1)}\sum_t\langle -u_t, \theta\rangle\bigr)max{0,∥uˉT​∥1​−ε/2}≤T1​(∑t​⟨−ut​,θt​⟩−minθ∈B∞​(1)​∑t​⟨−ut​,θ⟩).
  5. Online gradient descent: regret at most DGTDG\sqrt TDGT​ with step η=D/(GT)\eta = D/(G\sqrt T)η=D/(GT​).
  6. Theorem 21 (response-satisfiability and approachability): for every y∈[0,1]y \in [0,1]y∈[0,1] some w∈Δm+1w \in \Delta_{m+1}w∈Δm+1​ has u(w,y)∈B1(ε/2)u(w, y) \in B_1(\varepsilon/2)u(w,y)∈B1​(ε/2); hence some algorithm choosing wtw_twt​ from y1,…,yt−1y_1, \dots, y_{t-1}y1​,…,yt−1​ drives the distance of the average payoff to B1(ε/2)B_1(\varepsilon/2)B1​(ε/2) to 000 against every outcome sequence in [0,1][0,1][0,1].

Significance

The bound shows that a forecaster with logarithmic per-round cost has calibration error vanishing at rate T−1/2T^{-1/2}T−1/2 against every outcome sequence. Earlier calibrated forecasters required solving a linear program or computing a fixed point each round. The construction is also the paper's worked instance of its general equivalence: a calibration problem, posed as approachability of an ℓ₁ ball, is solved by a no-regret learner on the dual unit cube together with a halfspace oracle.

The result is proved in the paper; no machine-checked version is known to exist. The formalization makes explicit three points the paper leaves informal: the step size, the sign of the gradient step, and the gap between the forecast distributions and the sampled forecasts. The milestones are reusable on their own: the ℓ₁/ℓ∞ duality, and the regret bound of online gradient descent for linear losses on a general closed convex set.

Difficulty

The chain (12)–(14) looks like a direct composition, but each link has content. The oracle guarantee needs a case analysis over the sign pattern of θ\thetaθ, including the degenerate case θ(i+1)=0\theta(i+1) = 0θ(i+1)=0. The reduction (12) needs the duality (13) with attained minima, and it holds only outside the ball B1(ε/2)B_1(\varepsilon/2)B1​(ε/2). The regret bound of online gradient descent needs the non-expansiveness of the Euclidean projection and a telescoping argument. The tempting shortcut of quoting "OGD has regret O(T)O(\sqrt T)O(T​)" does not give the stated constant without fixing the step size.

Formalization scope

Vectors are EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin (m+1)), with grid index i∈{0,…,m}i \in \{0, \dots, m\}i∈{0,…,m} as Fin (m+1) and i/mi/mi/m as a real quotient; the ℓ₁ norm and the cube are written out coordinatewise. Rounds are t=1,…,Tt = 1, \dots, Tt=1,…,T. Minima over sets are stated through IsLeast or as the infimum of the image of a nonempty bounded set. Algorithm 3 is a relation that allows every sign-change index the binary search might return. The projection is any Euclidean minimizer onto the cube.

Conventions and corrections, each disclosed in the item's Formalization Note:

  • Gradient-step sign. Algorithm 4 prints θt−ηut\theta_t - \eta u_tθt​−ηut​, but the proof runs the learner on the losses ft=−utf_t = -u_tft​=−ut​ (condition 2), so the step is θt+ηut\theta_t + \eta u_tθt​+ηut​. With the printed sign the bound fails.
  • Step size. The page sets η=O(T−1/2)\eta = O(T^{-1/2})η=O(T−1/2); the goal pins η=(m+1)/T\eta = \sqrt{(m+1)/T}η=(m+1)/T​, the standard tuning with radius m+1\sqrt{m+1}m+1​ of the cube and ∥ut∥2≤1\|u_t\|_2 \le 1∥ut​∥2​≤1. The page's D=1/εD = \sqrt{1/\varepsilon}D=1/ε​ is not the cube's diameter.
  • Forecast distributions. The rate is that of the distributions wtw_twt​, the expectation of the calibration vector over the forecaster's draws (Lemma 20). The high-probability statement for the sampled forecasts is not formalized, nor is the running-time claim.
  • Other misprints. Algorithm 3's header "w↦θw \mapsto \thetaw↦θ" is θ↦w\theta \mapsto wθ↦w, and the calibration vector has m+1m + 1m+1 coordinates, not ⌊ε−1⌋\lfloor \varepsilon^{-1} \rfloor⌊ε−1⌋.
  • Added hypotheses. m≥1m \ge 1m≥1 and T≥1T \ge 1T≥1.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out. The rate is defined from Definition 19's formula, not as a distance, and the step size is pinned. A free step size would make the bound false, and an empty oracle relation would make it vacuous; milestone 3's existence clause excludes the latter.

Contributions are welcome on each milestone. The online gradient descent bound and the ℓ₁/ℓ∞ duality are independent of calibration. The published one-step inequality LogRegretOCO.OGD.one_step_inequality is included as a reference item for the regret bound.

Selected references

  • J. Abernethy, P. L. Bartlett, E. Hazan, Blackwell Approachability and No-Regret Learning are Equivalent, COLT 2011, JMLR W&CP 19, pp. 27–46, 2011. https://proceedings.mlr.press/v19/abernethy11b.html
  • D. P. Foster, R. V. Vohra, Asymptotic calibration, Biometrika 85(2), 1998. https://doi.org/10.1093/biomet/85.2.379
  • D. P. Foster, A proof of calibration via Blackwell's approachability theorem, Games and Economic Behavior 29, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1006/game.1999.0724
  • D. P. Foster, R. V. Vohra, Calibrated learning and correlated equilibrium, Games and Economic Behavior 21, 1997. https://doi.org/10.1006/game.1997.0595
  • S. Mannor, G. Stoltz, A geometric proof of calibration, Mathematics of Operations Research 35(4), 2010. https://arxiv.org/abs/0908.3576
  • M. Zinkevich, Online convex programming and generalized infinitesimal gradient ascent, ICML 2003. https://dl.acm.org/doi/10.5555/3041838.3041955
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
Functional AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

The Rate of Convergence of Nesterov's Accelerated Forward-Backward Method is Actually Faster than 1/k^2 II: For α > 3, the Iterates Converge Weakly to a Minimizer of Ψ + ΦResearch Paper

Motivation

Many problems in signal processing, statistics and machine learning take the additively separable form

min⁡{Ψ(x)+Φ(x):x∈H},\min\{\Psi(x) + \Phi(x) : x \in \mathcal H\},min{Ψ(x)+Φ(x):x∈H},

a smooth term Φ\PhiΦ plus a nonsmooth but "simple" term Ψ\PsiΨ, such as an ℓ1\ell^1ℓ1 penalty or the indicator function of a convex constraint set. The forward-backward method alternates a gradient step on Φ\PhiΦ with a proximal step on Ψ\PsiΨ. Beck and Teboulle's FISTA (Beck–Teboulle 2009) combined it with Nesterov's acceleration and improved the worst-case rate for function values from O(k−1)\mathcal O(k^{-1})O(k−1) to O(k−2)\mathcal O(k^{-2})O(k−2). Whether the iterates of the accelerated scheme converge at all, and not just their function values, remained unsettled for a long time; in the words of Attouch and Peypouquet, it "puzzled researchers for over two decades".

Timeline.

  • 1967: Opial proves that weak convergence of a sequence in a Hilbert space follows from two facts, the convergence of its distance to every point of a target set and the location of its weak cluster points in that set (Opial 1967).
  • 2009: Beck and Teboulle introduce FISTA, with an O(k−2)\mathcal O(k^{-2})O(k−2) rate for function values.
  • 2014: Su, Boyd and Candès read the accelerated method as a discretization of the ODE x¨+αtx˙+∇Θ(x)=0\ddot x + \frac{\alpha}{t}\dot x + \nabla\Theta(x) = 0x¨+tα​x˙+∇Θ(x)=0 (Su–Boyd–Candès 2014).
  • 2014–2015: for the variant with inertial coefficient k−1k+α−1\frac{k-1}{k+\alpha-1}k+α−1k−1​ and α>3\alpha > 3α>3, Chambolle and Dossal (2015) and, independently, Attouch, Chbani, Peypouquet and Redont (arXiv:1507.04782) prove weak convergence of the iterates.
  • 2016: Attouch and Peypouquet (arXiv:1510.08740, SIAM J. Optim. 26(3), 2016) prove the o(k−2)o(k^{-2})o(k−2) rate and, as Theorem 3, give a short proof of weak convergence from the same energy estimates.

The case α=3\alpha = 3α=3, the original choice of FISTA, is not covered by this result.

Setting

Let H\mathcal HH be a real Hilbert space with scalar product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥.

  • Ψ:H→R∪{+∞}\Psi : \mathcal H \to \mathbb R \cup \{+\infty\}Ψ:H→R∪{+∞} is proper (finite somewhere), lower-semicontinuous and convex. The value +∞+\infty+∞ matters: indicator functions of closed convex sets are the main example.
  • Φ:H→R\Phi : \mathcal H \to \mathbb RΦ:H→R is convex and continuously differentiable, and its gradient ∇Φ\nabla\Phi∇Φ is LLL-Lipschitz continuous.
  • Θ=Ψ+Φ\Theta = \Psi + \PhiΘ=Ψ+Φ, and S=argmin⁡ΘS = \operatorname{argmin}\ThetaS=argminΘ is assumed nonempty.
  • For s>0s > 0s>0, the proximal map prox⁡sΨ(x)\operatorname{prox}_{s\Psi}(x)proxsΨ​(x) is the unique minimizer of y↦Ψ(y)+12s∥y−x∥2y \mapsto \Psi(y) + \frac{1}{2s}\|y - x\|^2y↦Ψ(y)+2s1​∥y−x∥2.

Given α>0\alpha > 0α>0 and s>0s > 0s>0, algorithm (2) generates (xk)(x_k)(xk​) by

yk=xk+k−1k+α−1(xk−xk−1),xk+1=prox⁡sΨ(yk−s∇Φ(yk)).y_k = x_k + \frac{k-1}{k+\alpha-1}(x_k - x_{k-1}),\qquad x_{k+1} = \operatorname{prox}_{s\Psi}\big(y_k - s\nabla\Phi(y_k)\big).yk​=xk​+k+α−1k−1​(xk​−xk−1​),xk+1​=proxsΨ​(yk​−s∇Φ(yk​)).

The auxiliary sequence (6) is zk=xk+k−1α−1(xk−xk−1)z_k = x_k + \frac{k-1}{\alpha-1}(x_k - x_{k-1})zk​=xk​+α−1k−1​(xk​−xk−1​). For a point x∗x^*x∗, the proof of Theorem 3 uses

δk=(k−1)[∥xk−x∗∥2−∥xk−1−x∗∥2]+(α−1)∥xk−x∗∥2.\delta_k = (k-1)\big[\|x_k - x^*\|^2 - \|x_{k-1} - x^*\|^2\big] + (\alpha-1)\|x_k - x^*\|^2 .δk​=(k−1)[∥xk​−x∗∥2−∥xk−1​−x∗∥2]+(α−1)∥xk​−x∗∥2.

A sequence (xk)(x_k)(xk​) converges weakly to xˉ\bar xxˉ, written xk⇀xˉx_k \rightharpoonup \bar xxk​⇀xˉ, if ⟨xk,y⟩→⟨xˉ,y⟩\langle x_k, y\rangle \to \langle \bar x, y\rangle⟨xk​,y⟩→⟨xˉ,y⟩ for every y∈Hy \in \mathcal Hy∈H.

In Lean these are theta, extrap (yky_kyk​), IsAccelFBRun and zSeq (shared definitions in the namespace NesterovFB.Rates), and deltaSeq in the namespace NesterovFB.Weak. The predicates IsProperClosedConvex and IsProx and the predicate WeakTendsto are reused from the platform.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3 (p. 5)

Under the assumptions above, with α>3\alpha > 3α>3 and 0<s<1/L0 < s < 1/L0<s<1/L,

∃ xˉ∈S:xk⇀xˉ.\exists\, \bar x \in S:\quad x_k \rightharpoonup \bar x .∃xˉ∈S:xk​⇀xˉ.

The limit is required to be a minimizer of Θ\ThetaΘ; weak convergence to an arbitrary point would be a weaker statement.

Milestones (proof of Theorem 3, p. 5)

For every x∗∈Sx^* \in Sx∗∈S and k≥1k \ge 1k≥1:

∥xk+1−x∗∥2≤∥yk−x∗∥2,\|x_{k+1} - x^*\|^2 \le \|y_k - x^*\|^2,∥xk+1​−x∗∥2≤∥yk​−x∗∥2, δk+1−δk≤2(k+α−1) ∥xk−xk−1∥2,\delta_{k+1} - \delta_k \le 2(k+\alpha-1)\,\|x_k - x_{k-1}\|^2,δk+1​−δk​≤2(k+α−1)∥xk​−xk−1​∥2, lim⁡k→∞∥zk−x∗∥ exists,lim⁡k→∞∥xk−x∗∥ exists.\lim_{k\to\infty}\|z_k - x^*\| \text{ exists},\qquad \lim_{k\to\infty}\|x_k - x^*\| \text{ exists}.k→∞lim​∥zk​−x∗∥ exists,k→∞lim​∥xk​−x∗∥ exists.

Significance

The result. Theorem 3 shows that the accelerated forward-backward method with α>3\alpha > 3α>3 behaves like the unaccelerated method in one important respect: its iterates converge to a solution rather than just producing small function values. In infinite-dimensional settings (inverse problems, PDE-constrained optimization, signal recovery in function spaces) weak convergence is the natural notion, and strong convergence can fail. The four milestones are the steps that matter for other analyses too: a "Fejér-type" step inequality from the extrapolated point, and the convergence of the distance to every minimizer.

Formalizing it. The result is proved in the literature; no machine-checked proof of it is known. A complete formalization needs the energy estimates of the paper's §1.1–1.2 (summability of k∥xk−xk−1∥2k\|x_k - x_{k-1}\|^2k∥xk​−xk−1​∥2, boundedness of (zk)(z_k)(zk​), and the convergence of k2∥xk+1−xk∥2+(k+1)2(Θ(xk+1)−min⁡Θ)k^2\|x_{k+1}-x_k\|^2 + (k+1)^2(\Theta(x_{k+1}) - \min\Theta)k2∥xk+1​−xk​∥2+(k+1)2(Θ(xk+1​)−minΘ)), which a companion mission poses separately, and Opial's lemma, which is not in Mathlib.

Difficulty

The unaccelerated forward-backward method is Fejér monotone: ∥xk+1−x∗∥\|x_{k+1} - x^*\|∥xk+1​−x∗∥ decreases for every minimizer x∗x^*x∗, and Opial's lemma applies directly. The accelerated iterates are not Fejér monotone. The first milestone only compares xk+1x_{k+1}xk+1​ with the extrapolated point yky_kyk​, and ∥yk−x∗∥\|y_k - x^*\|∥yk​−x∗∥ can exceed ∥xk−x∗∥\|x_k - x^*\|∥xk​−x∗∥ by the inertial term. The quantity ∥xk−x∗∥2\|x_k - x^*\|^2∥xk​−x∗∥2 therefore satisfies only a second-order inequality with coefficients that grow in kkk. The obvious attempt, to show that ∥xk−x∗∥\|x_k - x^*\|∥xk​−x∗∥ is eventually monotone and apply Opial's lemma as for the unaccelerated method, fails.

A second difficulty is the passage from distances to weak convergence: in a Hilbert space this needs the weak sequential compactness of bounded sets and the weak lower-semicontinuity of Θ\ThetaΘ (to place weak cluster points in SSS).

Formalization scope

  • H\mathcal HH is a general real Hilbert space (InnerProductSpace ℝ H, CompleteSpace H), not Rn\mathbb R^nRn; in finite dimensions weak and strong convergence coincide and the goal would be a different, weaker theorem.
  • Ψ\PsiΨ and Θ\ThetaΘ take values in EReal; Ψ\PsiΨ is never assumed real-valued.
  • LLL is a nonnegative real and "0<s<1/L0 < s < 1/L0<s<1/L" is written 0<s0 < s0<s, sL<1sL < 1sL<1, which also allows L=0L = 0L=0.
  • prox⁡sΨ\operatorname{prox}_{s\Psi}proxsΨ​ is a map PPP given with its minimization property; under the hypotheses it is unique, so this is the proximal map.
  • The run starts at k=1k = 1k=1 with x0,x1x_0, x_1x0​,x1​ arbitrary. At k=1k = 1k=1 the inertial coefficient vanishes, so x0x_0x0​ never matters; every sequence the paper generates satisfies the predicate.
  • "The limit exists" means a real limit. Weak convergence is the platform's WeakTendsto, not convergence in norm.
  • The milestones keep the standing hypothesis α>3\alpha > 3α>3 of Theorem 3, although the first two do not need it.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out by the sanity check: the hypotheses are jointly satisfiable, and the goal asks for weak convergence to a minimizer, so neither a vacuous hypothesis nor an arbitrary limit point is admitted.

Infrastructure that a complete development needs, and that is reusable beyond this mission: the descent inequality (9) of the proximal-gradient operator, Opial's lemma in a real Hilbert space, the weak lower-semicontinuity of proper lower-semicontinuous convex functions, and the lemma that a bounded real sequence whose positive increments are summable converges. Contributions of any of these are welcome.

Selected references

  • H. Attouch, J. Peypouquet, The rate of convergence of Nesterov's accelerated forward-backward method is actually faster than 1/k21/k^21/k2, SIAM J. Optim. 26(3):1824–1834, 2016. https://arxiv.org/abs/1510.08740 (v4 is the source of this mission)
  • H. Attouch, Z. Chbani, J. Peypouquet, P. Redont, Fast convergence of inertial dynamics and algorithms with asymptotic vanishing viscosity, Math. Program. 168, 2018. https://arxiv.org/abs/1507.04782
  • A. Chambolle, C. Dossal, On the convergence of the iterates of the "fast iterative shrinkage/thresholding algorithm", J. Optim. Theory Appl. 166, 2015. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10957-015-0746-4
  • A. Beck, M. Teboulle, A fast iterative shrinkage-thresholding algorithm for linear inverse problems, SIAM J. Imaging Sci. 2(1):183–202, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1137/080716542
  • Z. Opial, Weak convergence of the sequence of successive approximations for nonexpansive mappings, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 73:591–597, 1967. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9904-1967-11761-0
  • W. Su, S. Boyd, E. J. Candès, A differential equation for modeling Nesterov's accelerated gradient method: theory and insights, NIPS 2014. https://arxiv.org/abs/1503.01243
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
Optimization·Captain: mikedeng1

On Conjugate Convex Functions: Conjugation Is a Symmetric Correspondence Between Lower Semicontinuous Convex FunctionsResearch Paper

Motivation

Convex duality in optimization rests on one transformation: to a convex function fff one associates the function φ(ξ)=sup⁡x(Σxξ−f(x))\varphi(\xi) = \sup_x(\Sigma x\xi - f(x))φ(ξ)=supx​(Σxξ−f(x)), which records, for each slope ξ\xiξ, the best affine lower bound of fff with that slope. Lagrangian duality, the duality theory of linear and conic programming, the analysis of first-order methods through smoothness and strong convexity of conjugates, and the dual representations of risk measures and divergences all read off properties of fff from properties of φ\varphiφ. Each of these uses needs one fact: that the transformation loses no information, so that applying it twice returns fff.

That fact, for functions on Rn\mathbb R^nRn, is the theorem of W. Fenchel's five-page note On conjugate convex functions (Canad. J. Math. 1 (1949) 73–77). Its timeline:

  • 1912. W. H. Young proves the inequality ab≤F(a)+G(b)ab \le F(a) + G(b)ab≤F(a)+G(b) for a pair of mutually inverse increasing functions F′,G′F', G'F′,G′ of one variable (Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A 87, 1912).
  • 1949. Fenchel defines the conjugate of a convex function on a convex subset of Rn\mathbb R^nRn, without any differentiability, and proves that conjugation is a symmetric correspondence on convex functions that are semi-continuous from below and whose domain is closed relative to the function (Fenchel 1949).
  • 1965. J.-J. Moreau develops conjugation for convex functions with values in (−∞,+∞](-\infty, +\infty](−∞,+∞] on a real Hilbert space, together with the proximal map (Bull. SMF 93, 1965); the biconjugation theorem in this generality is called the Fenchel–Moreau theorem.
  • 1970. R. T. Rockafellar's Convex Analysis makes the conjugate the central object of finite-dimensional convex analysis (Princeton, 1970).

Setting

Points of Rn\mathbb R^nRn are x=(x1,…,xn)x = (x_1,\dots,x_n)x=(x1​,…,xn​), and Σxξ=x1ξ1+⋯+xnξn\Sigma x\xi = x_1\xi_1 + \dots + x_n\xi_nΣxξ=x1​ξ1​+⋯+xn​ξn​.

A standing pair (G,f)(G, f)(G,f) consists of a set G⊆RnG \subseteq \mathbb R^nG⊆Rn and a real function fff defined in GGG such that

  1. GGG is nonempty and convex;
  2. fff is convex on GGG: f((1−θ)x′+θx′′)≤(1−θ)f(x′)+θf(x′′)f((1-\theta)x' + \theta x'') \le (1-\theta)f(x') + \theta f(x'')f((1−θ)x′+θx′′)≤(1−θ)f(x′)+θf(x′′) for x′,x′′∈Gx', x'' \in Gx′,x′′∈G, 0<θ<10 < \theta < 10<θ<1;
  3. fff is semi-continuous from below on GGG: lim inf⁡x→x∗, x∈Gf(x)≥f(x∗)\liminf_{x \to x^*,\, x \in G} f(x) \ge f(x^*)liminfx→x∗,x∈G​f(x)≥f(x∗) for x∗∈Gx^* \in Gx∗∈G;
  4. GGG is closed relative to fff: f(x)→+∞f(x) \to +\inftyf(x)→+∞ as x→x∗x \to x^*x→x∗ within GGG, for every boundary point x∗x^*x∗ of GGG not in GGG.

GGG need be neither open, nor closed, nor bounded. The paper writes the lower limit as a "lim" with a bar under it; the milestone texts write it lim⁡x→x∗\lim_{x\to x^*}limx→x∗​, and it always means lim inf⁡\liminfliminf.

The conjugate pair of (G,f)(G, f)(G,f) is

Γ={ξ∈Rn:x↦Σxξ−f(x) is bounded above on G},φ(ξ)=sup⁡x∈G(Σxξ−f(x))(ξ∈Γ).\Gamma = \{\xi \in \mathbb R^n : x \mapsto \Sigma x\xi - f(x) \text{ is bounded above on } G\}, \qquad \varphi(\xi) = \sup_{x \in G}\bigl(\Sigma x\xi - f(x)\bigr)\quad (\xi \in \Gamma).Γ={ξ∈Rn:x↦Σxξ−f(x) is bounded above on G},φ(ξ)=x∈Gsup​(Σxξ−f(x))(ξ∈Γ).

The same construction applied to (Γ,φ)(\Gamma, \varphi)(Γ,φ) gives the pair (G∗,f∗)(G^*, f^*)(G∗,f∗), with f∗(x)=sup⁡ξ∈Γ(Σξx−φ(ξ))f^*(x) = \sup_{\xi\in\Gamma}(\Sigma\xi x - \varphi(\xi))f∗(x)=supξ∈Γ​(Σξx−φ(ξ)). An interior point of GGG is a point of the relative interior of GGG, its interior within its affine hull.

In Lean: IsClosedConvexPair G f, conjDomain G f =Γ= \Gamma=Γ, conjFun G f =φ= \varphi=φ, and (G∗,f∗)(G^*, f^*)(G∗,f∗) is conjDomain (conjDomain G f) (conjFun G f), conjFun (conjDomain G f) (conjFun G f).

Formalization targets

Goal: Fenchel's theorem (§3, p. 75)

For every standing pair (G,f)(G, f)(G,f):

(Γ,φ) is a standing pair,Σxξ≤f(x)+φ(ξ)  (x∈G, ξ∈Γ),(5)(\Gamma,\varphi) \text{ is a standing pair},\qquad \Sigma x\xi \le f(x) + \varphi(\xi)\ \ (x\in G,\ \xi\in\Gamma), \tag{5}(Γ,φ) is a standing pair,Σxξ≤f(x)+φ(ξ)  (x∈G, ξ∈Γ),(5)

with equality for some ξ∈Γ\xi \in \Gammaξ∈Γ at every interior point xxx of GGG;

G∗=G,f∗(x)=f(x)  (x∈G);G^* = G, \qquad f^*(x) = f(x)\ \ (x \in G);G∗=G,f∗(x)=f(x)  (x∈G);

and every standing pair (Γ′,φ′)(\Gamma', \varphi')(Γ′,φ′) whose conjugate pair is (G,f)(G, f)(G,f) equals (Γ,φ)(\Gamma, \varphi)(Γ,φ).

Milestones, in the order of the proof

  1. (5), with no hypothesis on (G,f)(G, f)(G,f).
  2. Γ≠∅\Gamma \ne \emptysetΓ=∅, and φ(ξ)=Σx∘ξ−f(x∘)\varphi(\xi) = \Sigma x^\circ\xi - f(x^\circ)φ(ξ)=Σx∘ξ−f(x∘) for some ξ∈Γ\xi\in\Gammaξ∈Γ at each interior point x∘x^\circx∘.
  3. Γ\GammaΓ and φ\varphiφ are convex.
  4. φ\varphiφ is semi-continuous from below and Γ\GammaΓ is closed relative to φ\varphiφ.
  5. (6): G⊆G∗G \subseteq G^*G⊆G∗ and f∗≤ff^* \le ff∗≤f on GGG.
  6. Two convex functions, semi-continuous from below on GGG and equal at the interior points of GGG, are equal on GGG.
  7. f∗=ff^* = ff∗=f on GGG.
  8. (7): sup⁡ξ∈Γ(Σξx∘−φ(ξ))=∞\sup_{\xi\in\Gamma}(\Sigma\xi x^\circ - \varphi(\xi)) = \inftysupξ∈Γ​(Σξx∘−φ(ξ))=∞ for every x∘∉Gx^\circ \notin Gx∘∈/G.

Significance

The theorem identifies, among convex functions on convex subsets of Rn\mathbb R^nRn, exactly the class on which conjugation is a bijection and an involution. It is the finite-dimensional base case of the Fenchel–Moreau theorem and underlies Fenchel's duality theorem for inf⁡(f−g)\inf(f - g)inf(f−g), the conjugate-based optimality conditions of convex programming, and the inversion of gradients of conjugate differentiable convex functions (the paper's §6, the Legendre transformation). The pair form is also how the result is used in practice: the conjugate of a function finite on a set comes with an explicit domain Γ\GammaΓ, and the theorem says that domain determines and is determined by GGG.

The result has been proved for 75 years. What a formalization adds is the theorem in Fenchel's own form: a real-valued function on an explicit convex domain rather than an extended-real function on all of Rn\mathbb R^nRn, the domain identity G∗=GG^* = GG∗=G together with the identity of values, and the attainment of equality in (5) at relative-interior points. Machine-checked versions of biconjugation exist in other forms: for extended-real functions on Hilbert spaces, for finite convex functions on all of Rn\mathbb R^nRn, and for functions on a set with a closed restricted epigraph over continuous linear functionals. None of them states the domain identity or the attained equality, and none is in the paper's pair form.

Difficulty

Milestones 1, 3, 4 and 5 follow from the definition of the conjugate alone. The content sits in three places.

  • Supporting hyperplanes at relative-interior points. When GGG is lower-dimensional, the topological interior of GGG is empty, and a supporting hyperplane must be produced inside the affine hull of GGG and then extended. Points that are interior to a segment of GGG but on its relative boundary do not suffice.
  • Passing from the interior to the boundary of GGG. Equality f∗=ff^* = ff∗=f at interior points does not by itself give equality at boundary points of GGG; it needs semi-continuity from below of both functions and convexity along segments ending at the boundary point.
  • G∗⊆GG^* \subseteq GG∗⊆G. Points outside the closure of GGG and boundary points of GGG not in GGG behave differently: a boundary point cannot be separated from GGG by a hyperplane, and the inclusion there depends on the condition that GGG be closed relative to fff. Without that condition the inclusion is false: for G=(0,1]G = (0, 1]G=(0,1] and f≡0f \equiv 0f≡0, the point 000 lies in G∗G^*G∗.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbb R^nRn is Fin n → ℝ with its product topology, which is the Euclidean one; Σxξ\Sigma x\xiΣxξ is Mathlib's x ⬝ᵥ ξ. The paper's Σξx\Sigma\xi xΣξx in G∗,f∗G^*, f^*G∗,f∗ is ξ ⬝ᵥ x, equal by commutativity.
  • fff is a total function (Fin n → ℝ) → ℝ, but every hypothesis and conclusion concerns its values on GGG only: ConvexOn ℝ G f, LowerSemicontinuousOn f G, and Tendsto f (𝓝[G] x) atTop for x ∈ closure G \ G.
  • φ\varphiφ is the real sSup, which is 000 on unbounded sets; it is evaluated only on Γ\GammaΓ.
  • Three readings are fixed and disclosed in the goal's Formalization Note:
    • (P1) GGG is nonempty. The paper assumes it tacitly and proves Γ≠∅\Gamma \neq \emptysetΓ=∅.
    • (P2) Interior points are relative-interior points (intrinsicInterior ℝ G). The paper's segment definition makes the equality clause false, and the topological interior makes it vacuous for lower-dimensional GGG.
    • (P3) Uniqueness is stated as the symmetry gives it. The literal "one and only one Γ\GammaΓ, φ\varphiφ with these properties, (5) and equality at interior points" is false: for G=[0,1]G = [0,1]G=[0,1], f≡0f \equiv 0f≡0, the pair Γ′={0}\Gamma' = \{0\}Γ′={0}, φ′(0)=0\varphi'(0) = 0φ′(0)=0 also qualifies.
  • A statement of the goal that asserts only f∗=ff^* = ff∗=f on GGG and drops G∗=GG^* = GG∗=G is a different and much weaker theorem; the goal carries the domain identity.
  • Needed infrastructure: supporting hyperplanes to convex sets at relative-interior points (Mathlib has separation theorems for Fin n → ℝ and the intrinsic interior), affine minorants of convex functions on lower-dimensional domains, and the boundary-limit argument of milestone 6. All of these are reusable beyond this mission. Proofs of any milestone, and alternative routes to the goal, are welcome.

Selected references

  • W. Fenchel, On conjugate convex functions, Canadian Journal of Mathematics 1 (1949), 73–77. https://doi.org/10.4153/CJM-1949-007-x
  • W. H. Young, On classes of summable functions and their Fourier series, Proceedings of the Royal Society of London A 87 (1912), 225–229. https://doi.org/10.1098/rspa.1912.0076
  • J.-J. Moreau, Proximité et dualité dans un espace hilbertien, Bulletin de la Société Mathématique de France 93 (1965), 273–299. https://doi.org/10.24033/bsmf.1625
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
12 thms2 active usersReviewed
Functional AnalysisOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

On the Douglas–Rachford Splitting Method and the Proximal Point Algorithm for Maximal Monotone Operators: Generalized Douglas–Rachford Splitting Converges Weakly if A+B Has a Zero, Else Is UnboundedResearch Paper

Motivation

Many problems in convex optimization, variational inequalities and equilibrium modelling reduce to finding a point xxx with 0∈Ax+Bx0 \in A x + B x0∈Ax+Bx, where AAA and BBB are maximal monotone operators on a real Hilbert space H\mathcal HH: for example, minimizing f+gf + gf+g for closed proper convex f,gf, gf,g is the case A=∂fA = \partial fA=∂f, B=∂gB = \partial gB=∂g. When the resolvent of A+BA + BA+B is hard to evaluate but the resolvents of AAA and BBB separately are easy, one uses a splitting method. Douglas–Rachford splitting, introduced for monotone operators by Lions and Mercier (1979) after an alternating-direction scheme of Douglas and Rachford (1956) for the heat equation, is the most widely used one; through its dual form it underlies the alternating direction method of multipliers (ADMM) used throughout large-scale optimization and statistics.

Eckstein and Bertsekas (MIT report LIDS-P-1919, 1989; Mathematical Programming 55, 1992) showed that Douglas–Rachford splitting is a special case of the proximal point algorithm applied to a single derived operator, the splitting operator Sλ,A,BS_{\lambda,A,B}Sλ,A,B​. This identification lets the convergence theory of the proximal point algorithm transfer to splitting, and yields a generalized method with inexact resolvent evaluations and relaxation.

Timeline.

  • Minty (1962): a monotone TTT is maximal iff I+TI + TI+T is onto.
  • Rockafellar (1976): the proximal point algorithm with variable stepsizes and summable errors converges weakly to a zero.
  • Lions and Mercier (1979): Douglas–Rachford splitting for maximal monotone AAA, BBB; its map Gλ,A,BG_{\lambda,A,B}Gλ,A,B​ is firmly nonexpansive.
  • Gol'shtein and Tret'yakov (1979): relaxed proximal iterations with factors ρk∈(0,2)\rho_k \in (0,2)ρk​∈(0,2), in finite dimension, with a fixed stepsize.
  • Eckstein and Bertsekas (1989/1992): the splitting operator; Douglas–Rachford as a proximal point method; the generalized proximal point algorithm and the generalized Douglas–Rachford method, including the case with no solution.

Setting

An operator on H\mathcal HH is a subset T⊆H×HT \subseteq \mathcal H \times \mathcal HT⊆H×H, with Tx={y∣(x,y)∈T}Tx = \{y \mid (x,y) \in T\}Tx={y∣(x,y)∈T}; it may be multivalued and partially defined. Its domain is dom⁡T={x∣Tx≠∅}\operatorname{dom} T = \{x \mid Tx \ne \emptyset\}domT={x∣Tx=∅}, its image im⁡T\operatorname{im} TimT the projection on the second coordinate, its inverse T−1={(y,x)∣(x,y)∈T}T^{-1} = \{(y,x) \mid (x,y) \in T\}T−1={(y,x)∣(x,y)∈T}. Scaling and sum are cT={(x,cy)}cT = \{(x, cy)\}cT={(x,cy)} and A+B={(x,y+z)∣(x,y)∈A,(x,z)∈B}A + B = \{(x, y+z) \mid (x,y) \in A, (x,z) \in B\}A+B={(x,y+z)∣(x,y)∈A,(x,z)∈B}; III is the identity. TTT is monotone if ⟨x′−x,y′−y⟩≥0\langle x' - x, y' - y\rangle \ge 0⟨x′−x,y′−y⟩≥0 for all (x,y),(x′,y′)∈T(x,y),(x',y') \in T(x,y),(x′,y′)∈T, and maximal monotone if no other monotone operator strictly contains it. The resolvent is JcT=(I+cT)−1J_{cT} = (I + cT)^{-1}JcT​=(I+cT)−1, and zer⁡T={x∣0∈Tx}\operatorname{zer} T = \{x \mid 0 \in Tx\}zerT={x∣0∈Tx}. An operator JJJ is firmly nonexpansive if ∥y′−y∥2≤⟨x′−x,y′−y⟩\|y'-y\|^2 \le \langle x'-x, y'-y\rangle∥y′−y∥2≤⟨x′−x,y′−y⟩ for all (x,y),(x′,y′)∈J(x,y),(x',y') \in J(x,y),(x′,y′)∈J.

For λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0 the Douglas–Rachford map is Gλ,A,B=JλA∘(2JλB−I)+(I−JλB)G_{\lambda,A,B} = J_{\lambda A} \circ (2J_{\lambda B} - I) + (I - J_{\lambda B})Gλ,A,B​=JλA​∘(2JλB​−I)+(I−JλB​), and the splitting operator is

Sλ,A,B={(v+λb, u−v)∣(u,b)∈B, (v,a)∈A, v+λa=u−λb}.S_{\lambda,A,B} = \{(v + \lambda b,\ u - v) \mid (u,b) \in B,\ (v,a) \in A,\ v + \lambda a = u - \lambda b\}.Sλ,A,B​={(v+λb, u−v)∣(u,b)∈B, (v,a)∈A, v+λa=u−λb}.

Its zero set is Zλ∗={u+λb∣b∈Bu, −b∈Au}Z^*_\lambda = \{u + \lambda b \mid b \in Bu,\ -b \in Au\}Zλ∗​={u+λb∣b∈Bu, −b∈Au}.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 7 (generalized Douglas–Rachford splitting)

Let AAA, BBB be maximal monotone, λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0, and let {zk},{uk},{vk}⊆H\{z^k\}, \{u^k\}, \{v^k\} \subseteq \mathcal H{zk},{uk},{vk}⊆H, αk,βk≥0\alpha_k, \beta_k \ge 0αk​,βk​≥0 and ρk\rho_kρk​ satisfy

∥uk−JλB(zk)∥≤βk,∥vk+1−JλA(2uk−zk)∥≤αk,zk+1=zk+ρk(vk+1−uk),\|u^k - J_{\lambda B}(z^k)\| \le \beta_k,\quad \|v^{k+1} - J_{\lambda A}(2u^k - z^k)\| \le \alpha_k,\quad z^{k+1} = z^k + \rho_k (v^{k+1} - u^k),∥uk−JλB​(zk)∥≤βk​,∥vk+1−JλA​(2uk−zk)∥≤αk​,zk+1=zk+ρk​(vk+1−uk),

with ∑αk<∞\sum \alpha_k < \infty∑αk​<∞, ∑βk<∞\sum \beta_k < \infty∑βk​<∞ and 0<inf⁡ρk≤sup⁡ρk<20 < \inf \rho_k \le \sup \rho_k < 20<infρk​≤supρk​<2. Then

zer⁡(A+B)≠∅  ⟹  zk⇀z∗ for some z∗∈Zλ∗,zer⁡(A+B)=∅  ⟹  {zk} unbounded.\operatorname{zer}(A+B) \ne \emptyset \implies z^k \rightharpoonup z^* \text{ for some } z^* \in Z^*_\lambda,\qquad \operatorname{zer}(A+B) = \emptyset \implies \{z^k\} \text{ unbounded}.zer(A+B)=∅⟹zk⇀z∗ for some z∗∈Zλ∗​,zer(A+B)=∅⟹{zk} unbounded.

Milestones

In the paper's order: Minty's theorem (Theorem 1); properties of firmly nonexpansive operators (Lemma 1); the monotone / firmly nonexpansive correspondence (Theorem 2, Corollaries 2.1–2.3); zeros as fixed points of resolvents (Lemma 2); the generalized proximal point algorithm (Theorem 3): weak convergence to a zero of TTT under summable errors, relaxation in (0,2)(0,2)(0,2) and stepsizes bounded away from 000, unboundedness when zer⁡T=∅\operatorname{zer} T = \emptysetzerT=∅; (maximal) monotonicity of Sλ,A,BS_{\lambda,A,B}Sλ,A,B​ (Theorem 4) and firm nonexpansiveness of its resolvent (Corollary 4.1); zer⁡Sλ,A,B=Zλ∗\operatorname{zer} S_{\lambda,A,B} = Z^*_\lambdazerSλ,A,B​=Zλ∗​ (Theorem 5); and (I+Sλ,A,B)−1=Gλ,A,B(I + S_{\lambda,A,B})^{-1} = G_{\lambda,A,B}(I+Sλ,A,B​)−1=Gλ,A,B​ (Theorem 6).

Significance

Theorem 7 gives convergence of Douglas–Rachford splitting with both resolvents evaluated inexactly and with over- or under-relaxation, and it characterizes the case without a solution: the iterates are unbounded exactly when A+BA + BA+B has no zero. The relaxed, inexact form is the one implementations actually run, and through Gabay's identification of ADMM with Douglas–Rachford on the dual it is the basis of the paper's Theorem 8, a convergence theorem for a generalized ADMM. Theorem 3, used to prove Theorem 7, is itself a standard reference form of the inexact relaxed proximal point algorithm.

All results here are proved in the paper (one step in the unbounded case of Theorem 3 rests on results of Rockafellar 1969 and 1970 on sums of maximal monotone operators). As of 2026, neither Douglas–Rachford splitting in this generality nor the generalized proximal point algorithm is formalized in Lean or Mathlib. Mathlib has Hilbert spaces, weak topologies and summability, but no theory of maximal monotone operators, Minty's theorem or resolvents. The mission builds that layer and machine-checks the paper's results on it.

Difficulty

The convergence argument cannot be strong: in infinite dimensions the proximal point algorithm need not converge in norm (Güler 1991), so the conclusion is weak convergence, and identifying the weak limit as a zero requires the weak–strong closedness of the graph of a maximal monotone operator. The maximality halves of Theorems 2 and 4 need Minty's theorem, whose proof requires a nontrivial existence argument (all known proofs use Zorn's lemma or an equivalent). The unbounded case of Theorem 3 is a contradiction argument that truncates TTT by the subdifferential of the indicator of a ball and invokes two external facts: maximality of the sum of two maximal monotone operators under an interiority condition (Rockafellar 1970), and existence of zeros for maximal monotone operators with bounded domain (Rockafellar 1969). Neither is available in Lean. The natural first idea for Theorem 7, iterating the firm nonexpansiveness of Gλ,A,BG_{\lambda,A,B}Gλ,A,B​, gives neither the error tolerance on both resolvents nor the unbounded case without the full machinery of Theorem 3.

Formalization scope

  • H\mathcal HH is a real inner product space that is complete ([CompleteSpace H]). An operator is a map H → Set H. Monotonicity, maximal monotonicity, dom⁡\operatorname{dom}dom, zer⁡\operatorname{zer}zer and the function-level resolvent predicate IsResolvent are the published definitions ThreeOpSplitting_Convergence_MonotoneOperators; weak convergence is the published WeakTendsto (⟨zk,y⟩→⟨z∗,y⟩\langle z^k, y\rangle \to \langle z^*, y\rangle⟨zk,y⟩→⟨z∗,y⟩ for every yyy).
  • §2 notions are graph notions (opResolvent, IsFirmlyNonexpansiveOp, ...), so Theorem 2 and Corollary 2.1 can speak of resolvents that are a priori partial or multivalued. In Theorems 3, 6 and 7 the resolvents are maps J:H→HJ : \mathcal H \to \mathcal HJ:H→H with λ−1(x−Jx)∈A(Jx)\lambda^{-1}(x - J x) \in A(Jx)λ−1(x−Jx)∈A(Jx) for all xxx, unique by Corollary 2.2.
  • Sλ,A,BS_{\lambda,A,B}Sλ,A,B​ is defined by its set formula, not as Gλ,A,B−1−IG_{\lambda,A,B}^{-1} - IGλ,A,B−1​−I; with the latter, Theorem 6 and Corollary 4.1 would be unfoldings. Taking free resolvent functions without the IsResolvent hypothesis would make the iteration unrelated to AAA and BBB; the hypothesis is always present.
  • inf⁡ρk>0\inf \rho_k > 0infρk​>0, sup⁡ρk<2\sup \rho_k < 2supρk​<2 are encoded as ∃ ρ1,ρ2\exists\, \rho_1, \rho_2∃ρ1​,ρ2​ with 0<ρ1≤ρk≤ρ2<20 < \rho_1 \le \rho_k \le \rho_2 < 20<ρ1​≤ρk​≤ρ2​<2; inf⁡ck>0\inf c_k > 0infck​>0 as ∃ c0>0\exists\, c_0 > 0∃c0​>0, c0≤ckc_0 \le c_kc0​≤ck​. Summability is Summable with nonnegative terms. Sequences start at k=0k = 0k=0; v0v^0v0 is unused. Unboundedness is ¬ Bornology.IsBounded (Set.range z).
  • Printed slips corrected and disclosed in the items: Theorem 7 states its sequences in Rn\mathbb R^nRn (read H\mathcal HH); Theorem 3 prints (1−ρk)wk(1 - \rho_k) w^k(1−ρk​)wk (read ρkwk\rho_k w^kρk​wk, as on p. 9 and in the proof) and (I+cT)−1(I + cT)^{-1}(I+cT)−1 (read (I+ckT)−1(I + c_k T)^{-1}(I+ck​T)−1).
  • Not included: Corollary 2.4, Corollaries 6.1–6.2 (special cases of Theorem 7), §5 (partial inverses, generalized ADMM). The second sentence of Corollary 6.1 (convergence of JλB(zk)J_{\lambda B}(z^k)JλB​(zk)) is deliberately excluded: its argument does not transfer weak convergence (Svaiter 2011).
  • Welcome contributions: Minty's theorem in Hilbert space, the resolvent calculus of §2, and weak-limit lemmas (Opial-type arguments) are reusable well beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • J. Eckstein and D. P. Bertsekas, On the Douglas–Rachford splitting method and the proximal point algorithm for maximal monotone operators, MIT report LIDS-P-1919, 1989; Mathematical Programming 55 (1992) 293–318. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01581204
  • P.-L. Lions and B. Mercier, Splitting algorithms for the sum of two nonlinear operators, SIAM J. Numer. Anal. 16 (1979) 964–979. https://doi.org/10.1137/0716071
  • G. J. Minty, Monotone (nonlinear) operators in Hilbert space, Duke Math. J. 29 (1962) 341–346. https://doi.org/10.1215/S0012-7094-62-02933-2
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Monotone operators and the proximal point algorithm, SIAM J. Control Optim. 14 (1976) 877–898. https://doi.org/10.1137/0314056
  • O. Güler, On the convergence of the proximal point algorithm for convex minimization, SIAM J. Control Optim. 29 (1991) 403–419. https://doi.org/10.1137/0329022
  • B. F. Svaiter, On weak convergence of the Douglas–Rachford method, SIAM J. Control Optim. 49 (2011) 280–287. https://doi.org/10.1137/100788100
17 thms2 active usersReviewed
Machine LearningOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

SAGA: A Fast Incremental Gradient Method With Support for Non-Strongly Convex Composite Objectives II: The 4n/k Rate of the Averaged Iterate without Strong ConvexityResearch Paper

Motivation

Many problems in statistics and machine learning minimize an average of nnn losses, one per data point, plus a regularizer: least squares, logistic regression, and their ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​- or ℓ2\ell_2ℓ2​-penalized versions. When nnn is large, a full gradient costs nnn component gradients, while stochastic gradient descent, which uses one component per step, needs decreasing step sizes and converges slowly. Incremental gradient methods with variance reduction (SAG, SVRG, SDCA, Finito, MISO) use one component gradient per step but converge at the rate of a full-gradient method.

SAGA (Defazio, Bach and Lacoste-Julien, NIPS 2014, arXiv:1407.0202) is a method of this family. It handles a non-smooth regularizer through its proximal operator, and it comes with a guarantee when the losses are convex but not strongly convex. This mission covers that second guarantee, Theorem 2 of the paper. A companion mission covers the linear rate under strong convexity (Theorem 1, Corollary 1).

Timeline.

  • 2012: SAG (Le Roux, Schmidt and Bach) gives a linear rate for smooth, strongly convex finite sums. Its analysis does not cover a proximal term.
  • 2013: SVRG (Johnson and Zhang) gives a linear rate for the strongly convex case, using periodic full-gradient passes.
  • 2013: SDCA (Shalev-Shwartz and Zhang) works on the dual and needs strong convexity.
  • 2014: Prox-SVRG (Xiao and Zhang, arXiv:1403.4699) extends SVRG to composite objectives. Its key inequality is reused by SAGA's Theorem 2.
  • 2014: SAGA proves both a linear rate under strong convexity and an O(n/k)O(n/k)O(n/k) rate for the averaged iterate under convexity alone, for composite objectives.

Setting

Let d≥0d\ge 0d≥0 and n≥1n\ge 1n≥1. The components f1,…,fn:Rd→Rf_1,\dots,f_n:\mathbb R^d\to\mathbb Rf1​,…,fn​:Rd→R are convex and differentiable, and each gradient fi′f_i'fi′​ is LLL-Lipschitz (L>0L>0L>0). Write

f(x)=1n∑i=1nfi(x),f′(x)=1n∑i=1nfi′(x).f(x)=\frac1n\sum_{i=1}^n f_i(x),\qquad f'(x)=\frac1n\sum_{i=1}^n f_i'(x).f(x)=n1​i=1∑n​fi​(x),f′(x)=n1​i=1∑n​fi′​(x).

The regularizer h:Rd→Rh:\mathbb R^d\to\mathbb Rh:Rd→R is convex but possibly non-differentiable. The objective is the composite function F=f+hF=f+hF=f+h, and x∗x^*x∗ is any minimizer of FFF. Minimizers need not be unique, and f′(x∗)f'(x^*)f′(x∗) need not vanish.

The proximal operator with parameter γ>0\gamma>0γ>0 is

proxγh(y)=arg⁡min⁡x∈Rd{h(x)+12γ∥x−y∥2}.\mathrm{prox}_\gamma^h(y)=\arg\min_{x\in\mathbb R^d}\Big\{h(x)+\frac1{2\gamma}\|x-y\|^2\Big\}.proxγh​(y)=argx∈Rdmin​{h(x)+2γ1​∥x−y∥2}.

SAGA keeps an iterate xkx^kxk and a table of points ϕ1k,…,ϕnk\phi_1^k,\dots,\phi_n^kϕ1k​,…,ϕnk​, initialized as ϕi0=x0\phi_i^0=x^0ϕi0​=x0. At step k+1k+1k+1 it draws an index jjj uniformly from {1,…,n}\{1,\dots,n\}{1,…,n}, independently of the past, and sets

wk+1=xk−γ[fj′(xk)−fj′(ϕjk)+1n∑i=1nfi′(ϕik)],xk+1=proxγh(wk+1).w^{k+1}=x^k-\gamma\Big[f_j'(x^k)-f_j'(\phi_j^k)+\frac1n\sum_{i=1}^n f_i'(\phi_i^k)\Big],\qquad x^{k+1}=\mathrm{prox}_\gamma^h(w^{k+1}).wk+1=xk−γ[fj′​(xk)−fj′​(ϕjk​)+n1​i=1∑n​fi′​(ϕik​)],xk+1=proxγh​(wk+1).

It then sets ϕjk+1=xk\phi_j^{k+1}=x^kϕjk+1​=xk and leaves the other table entries unchanged. The averaged iterate is xˉk=1k∑t=1kxt\bar x^k=\frac1k\sum_{t=1}^k x^txˉk=k1​∑t=1k​xt, which excludes x0x^0x0.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 11)

With step size γ=1/(3L)\gamma=1/(3L)γ=1/(3L), for every k≥1k\ge1k≥1,

E[F(xˉk)]−F(x∗)≤4nk[2Ln∥x0−x∗∥2+f(x0)−⟨f′(x∗),x0−x∗⟩−f(x∗)].\mathbb E\big[F(\bar x^k)\big]-F(x^*)\le\frac{4n}{k}\Big[\frac{2L}{n}\|x^0-x^*\|^2+f(x^0)-\langle f'(x^*),x^0-x^*\rangle-f(x^*)\Big].E[F(xˉk)]−F(x∗)≤k4n​[n2L​∥x0−x∗∥2+f(x0)−⟨f′(x∗),x0−x∗⟩−f(x∗)].

The expectation is over the indices j1,…,jkj^1,\dots,j^kj1,…,jk. The constants are those printed in the paper.

Milestones (in attack order)

  1. Lemma 1 (p. 6) is an inner-product bound for averages of μ\muμ-strongly convex functions with LLL-Lipschitz gradients. It is stated for μ≥0\mu\ge0μ≥0, and Theorem 2 uses the case μ=0\mu=0μ=0.
  2. Lemma 2 (p. 7): 1n∑i∥fi′(ϕi)−fi′(x∗)∥2≤2L[1n∑ifi(ϕi)−f(x∗)−1n∑i⟨fi′(x∗),ϕi−x∗⟩]\frac1n\sum_i\|f_i'(\phi_i)-f_i'(x^*)\|^2\le 2L\big[\frac1n\sum_i f_i(\phi_i)-f(x^*)-\frac1n\sum_i\langle f_i'(x^*),\phi_i-x^*\rangle\big]n1​∑i​∥fi′​(ϕi​)−fi′​(x∗)∥2≤2L[n1​∑i​fi​(ϕi​)−f(x∗)−n1​∑i​⟨fi′​(x∗),ϕi​−x∗⟩].
  3. The bound on Δ\DeltaΔ (p. 12). Write Δ=−1γ(wk+1−xk)−f′(xk)\Delta=-\frac1\gamma(w^{k+1}-x^k)-f'(x^k)Δ=−γ1​(wk+1−xk)−f′(xk) for the gradient error. For every β>0\beta>0β>0, E∥Δ∥2≤(1+β−1)E∥fj′(ϕjk)−fj′(x∗)∥2+(1+β)E∥fj′(xk)−fj′(x∗)∥2\mathbb E\|\Delta\|^2\le(1+\beta^{-1})\mathbb E\|f_j'(\phi_j^k)-f_j'(x^*)\|^2+(1+\beta)\mathbb E\|f_j'(x^k)-f_j'(x^*)\|^2E∥Δ∥2≤(1+β−1)E∥fj′​(ϕjk​)−fj′​(x∗)∥2+(1+β)E∥fj′​(xk)−fj′​(x∗)∥2.
  4. The prox-SVRG inequality (p. 12): αE∥xk+1−x∗∥2≤α∥xk−x∗∥2−2αγE[F(xk+1)−F(x∗)]+2αγ2E∥Δ∥2\alpha\mathbb E\|x^{k+1}-x^*\|^2\le\alpha\|x^k-x^*\|^2-2\alpha\gamma\mathbb E[F(x^{k+1})-F(x^*)]+2\alpha\gamma^2\mathbb E\|\Delta\|^2αE∥xk+1−x∗∥2≤α∥xk−x∗∥2−2αγE[F(xk+1)−F(x∗)]+2αγ2E∥Δ∥2.
  5. The one-step Lyapunov decrease (p. 12): E[Tk+1]−Tk≤−14nE[F(xk+1)−F(x∗)]\mathbb E[T^{k+1}]-T^k\le-\frac1{4n}\mathbb E[F(x^{k+1})-F(x^*)]E[Tk+1]−Tk≤−4n1​E[F(xk+1)−F(x∗)]. Here T(x,ϕ)=1n∑ifi(ϕi)−f(x∗)−1n∑i⟨fi′(x∗),ϕi−x∗⟩+(c+α)∥x−x∗∥2T(x,\phi)=\frac1n\sum_i f_i(\phi_i)-f(x^*)-\frac1n\sum_i\langle f_i'(x^*),\phi_i-x^*\rangle+(c+\alpha)\|x-x^*\|^2T(x,ϕ)=n1​∑i​fi​(ϕi​)−f(x∗)−n1​∑i​⟨fi′​(x∗),ϕi​−x∗⟩+(c+α)∥x−x∗∥2, with c=3L2nc=\frac{3L}{2n}c=2n3L​ and α=3L8n\alpha=\frac{3L}{8n}α=8n3L​.

In milestones 3–5, E\mathbb EE is the expectation over the single index jjj of the next step, given the current state.

Significance

The result. Theorem 2 shows that one method, with a step size that depends only on LLL, covers composite problems that are not strongly convex. Examples are ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​-regularized least squares and logistic regression without a ridge term. On these problems the method converges in expected objective value at rate O(n/k)O(n/k)O(n/k). SAG has no proximal analysis, and SDCA requires strong convexity. With the same step size 1/(3L)1/(3L)1/(3L), the paper also states adaptivity to strong convexity, so no strong convexity constant has to be known in advance. The bound is in terms of T0T^0T0, a quantity computable from the starting point.

Formalizing it. The result is proved on paper, but the proof is not self-contained. Its central inequality (milestone 4) is quoted from the prox-SVRG analysis of Xiao and Zhang, with only the remark that their argument uses E[Δ]=0\mathbb E[\Delta]=0E[Δ]=0. A machine-checked proof must therefore reconstruct that argument for SAGA's estimator. To our knowledge, no machine-checked proof of SAGA, SVRG or prox-SVRG exists in Lean or Mathlib. The mission also produces reusable statements about convex functions with Lipschitz gradients (Lemmas 1 and 2) and an explicit finite model of a randomized incremental method.

Difficulty

The naive approach applies the non-expansiveness of the proximal operator to ∥xk+1−x∗∥2\|x^{k+1}-x^*\|^2∥xk+1−x∗∥2, as in the strongly convex proof. That bounds distances, but it produces no term in F(xk+1)−F(x∗)F(x^{k+1})-F(x^*)F(xk+1)−F(x∗). Without strong convexity, the distance terms cannot be traded for function values, so the argument yields no rate.

The function-value term comes from the prox-SVRG inequality (milestone 4), which the paper does not prove. Its difficulty is that xk+1x^{k+1}xk+1 depends on the same random index as Δ\DeltaΔ, so the cross term between them does not vanish in expectation even though E[Δ]=0\mathbb E[\Delta]=0E[Δ]=0. A second difficulty is bookkeeping: wk+1w^{k+1}wk+1 uses the old table, the table entry jjj receives xkx^kxk and not xk+1x^{k+1}xk+1, and the constants must make three coefficients vanish exactly. A final step converts the bound on 1k∑tE[F(xt)]\frac1k\sum_t\mathbb E[F(x^t)]k1​∑t​E[F(xt)] into a bound on E[F(xˉk)]\mathbb E[F(\bar x^k)]E[F(xˉk)], which requires Jensen's inequality for the convex FFF.

Formalization scope

  • Space and indices. Points live in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d). Components are indexed by Fin n (0-based), with n≥1n\ge1n≥1.
  • Gradients and smoothness. The gradients are given maps f' with HasGradientAt (f i) (f' i x) x at every point. Smoothness is the Lipschitz bound ∥fi′(x)−fi′(y)∥≤L∥x−y∥\|f_i'(x)-f_i'(y)\|\le L\|x-y\|∥fi′​(x)−fi′​(y)∥≤L∥x−y∥.
  • Convexity. Convexity is ConvexOn ℝ Set.univ. Lemma 1 uses StrongConvexOn Set.univ μ, whose modulus μ2∥x−y∥2\frac\mu2\|x-y\|^22μ​∥x−y∥2 is the paper's.
  • The regularizer. hhh is real-valued and convex. Extended-valued regularizers such as indicator functions are outside the statement.
  • The proximal map. The proximal operator enters as any map PPP such that P(y)P(y)P(y) minimizes h(z)+12γ∥z−y∥2h(z)+\frac1{2\gamma}\|z-y\|^2h(z)+2γ1​∥z−y∥2 for every yyy. For convex hhh this determines P=proxγhP=\mathrm{prox}_\gamma^hP=proxγh​.
  • State and expectation. The state is the pair (xk,ϕk)(x^k,\phi^k)(xk,ϕk). The expectation over kkk steps is the uniform average over the nkn^knk index sequences, which is exactly the law of kkk independent uniform indices.

Two trivializations are excluded. The averaged-iterate bound carries k≥1k\ge1k≥1, since at k=0k=0k=0 the factor 4n/k4n/k4n/k collapses to 000. The left side is FFF evaluated at the averaged point, not the average of F(xt)F(x^t)F(xt), which is a weaker intermediate step.

A complete development needs the descent lemma and co-coercivity for convex functions with Lipschitz gradients, the characterization and non-expansiveness of the proximal operator, and finite-sum manipulations over index sequences. The lemmas on smooth convex functions and on proximal operators are reusable beyond this mission. Contributions are welcome at every level: proofs of the milestones, a reusable proximal-operator library, and the telescoping argument for the goal.

Selected references

  • A. Defazio, F. Bach, S. Lacoste-Julien, SAGA: A Fast Incremental Gradient Method With Support for Non-Strongly Convex Composite Objectives, NIPS 2014. arXiv:1407.0202
  • L. Xiao, T. Zhang, A Proximal Stochastic Gradient Method with Progressive Variance Reduction, SIAM J. Optim. 24(4), 2014. arXiv:1403.4699
  • N. Le Roux, M. Schmidt, F. Bach, A Stochastic Gradient Method with an Exponential Convergence Rate for Finite Training Sets, NIPS 2012. arXiv:1202.6258
  • R. Johnson, T. Zhang, Accelerating Stochastic Gradient Descent using Predictive Variance Reduction, NIPS 2013. NeurIPS proceedings
  • S. Shalev-Shwartz, T. Zhang, Stochastic Dual Coordinate Ascent Methods for Regularized Loss Minimization, JMLR 14, 2013. arXiv:1209.1873
  • Y. Nesterov, Introductory Lectures on Convex Optimization, Kluwer, 2004. doi:10.1007/978-1-4419-8853-9
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimizationReinforcement Learning·Captain: mikedeng1

Twice Regularized MDPs and the Equivalence Between Robustness and Regularization 1: The Robust Value Function Is the Optimum of a Policy- and Value-Regularized Convex ProgramResearch Paper

Motivation

A Markov decision process (MDP) is solved for one model of its dynamics and rewards, but in practice that model is estimated from data, and a policy that is optimal for the estimate can perform poorly on the true system (Mannor et al., 2007). Robust MDPs address this by evaluating a policy against the worst model in an uncertainty set U\mathcal UU (Iyengar, 2005; Nilim and El Ghaoui, 2005; Wiesemann, Kuhn and Rustem, 2013). Robust planning, however, solves an inner optimization over U\mathcal UU at every Bellman update, which is expensive and does not scale to learning settings.

A separate line of work regularizes the policy (entropy, KL, Tsallis penalties) and observes empirically that regularized policies are robust to perturbations (Geist, Scherrer and Pietquin, 2019). Derman, Geist and Mannor (arXiv:2110.06267, NeurIPS 2021) make this precise: for uncertainty sets centred at a nominal model, the robust value function is the solution of a regularized problem posed on the nominal model alone, with a regularizer that is the support function of the uncertainty set. This mission formalizes that equivalence: Proposition 3.1, Theorem 3.1 and Theorem 4.1 of the paper.

Setting

Let S\mathcal SS and A\mathcal AA be finite sets of states and actions, A\mathcal AA nonempty, and X:=S×A\mathcal X := \mathcal S\times\mathcal AX:=S×A. Fix a discount factor γ∈(0,1)\gamma\in(0,1)γ∈(0,1) and a strictly positive initial distribution μ0∈ΔS\mu_0\in\Delta_{\mathcal S}μ0​∈ΔS​. A transition kernel PPP assigns to every pair (s,a)(s,a)(s,a) a probability distribution P(⋅∣s,a)P(\cdot\mid s,a)P(⋅∣s,a) on S\mathcal SS; a reward is r∈RXr\in\mathbb R^{\mathcal X}r∈RX. A policy π∈ΔAS\pi\in\Delta_{\mathcal A}^{\mathcal S}π∈ΔAS​ assigns to every state an action distribution πs\pi_sπs​.

For v∈RSv\in\mathbb R^{\mathcal S}v∈RS write rπ(s)=∑aπs(a)r(s,a)r^\pi(s) = \sum_a\pi_s(a)r(s,a)rπ(s)=∑a​πs​(a)r(s,a), Pπ(s′∣s)=∑aπs(a)P(s′∣s,a)P^\pi(s'\mid s) = \sum_a\pi_s(a)P(s'\mid s,a)Pπ(s′∣s)=∑a​πs​(a)P(s′∣s,a), and define the evaluation Bellman operator

T(P,r)πv:=rπ+γPπv.T^\pi_{(P,r)}v := r^\pi + \gamma P^\pi v .T(P,r)π​v:=rπ+γPπv.

The inner product on RS\mathbb R^{\mathcal S}RS is ⟨v,μ⟩=∑sv(s)μ(s)\langle v,\mu\rangle = \sum_s v(s)\mu(s)⟨v,μ⟩=∑s​v(s)μ(s), and the support function of a set C⊆RιC\subseteq\mathbb R^{\iota}C⊆Rι is σC(y)=max⁡a∈C⟨a,y⟩\sigma_C(y) = \max_{a\in C}\langle a,y\rangleσC​(y)=maxa∈C​⟨a,y⟩.

Given a set U\mathcal UU of models (P,r)(P,r)(P,r), the robust Bellman operator is

[Tπ,Uv](s):=min⁡(P,r)∈UT(P,r)πv(s),[T^{\pi,\mathcal U}v](s) := \min_{(P,r)\in\mathcal U}T^\pi_{(P,r)}v(s),[Tπ,Uv](s):=(P,r)∈Umin​T(P,r)π​v(s),

and the robust value function vπ,Uv^{\pi,\mathcal U}vπ,U is its fixed point. Around a nominal model (P0,r0)(P_0,r_0)(P0​,r0​), an s-rectangular uncertainty set U=(P0+P)×(r0+R)\mathcal U = (P_0+\mathcal P)\times(r_0+\mathcal R)U=(P0​+P)×(r0​+R) is given by sets Ps⊆RX\mathcal P_s\subseteq\mathbb R^{\mathcal X}Ps​⊆RX and Rs⊆RA\mathcal R_s\subseteq\mathbb R^{\mathcal A}Rs​⊆RA, one per state: its models are P(s′∣s,a)=P0(s′∣s,a)+Ps(s′,a)P(s'\mid s,a) = P_0(s'\mid s,a)+P_s(s',a)P(s′∣s,a)=P0​(s′∣s,a)+Ps​(s′,a) and r(s,a)=r0(s,a)+rs(a)r(s,a) = r_0(s,a)+r_s(a)r(s,a)=r0​(s,a)+rs​(a), with Ps∈PsP_s\in\mathcal P_sPs​∈Ps​ and rs∈Rsr_s\in\mathcal R_srs​∈Rs​ chosen independently for each sss. Finally [v⋅πs](s′,a):=v(s′)πs(a)[v\cdot\pi_s](s',a) := v(s')\pi_s(a)[v⋅πs​](s′,a):=v(s′)πs​(a).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.1 (general robust MDP)

For U=(P0+P)×(r0+R)\mathcal U = (P_0+\mathcal P)\times(r_0+\mathcal R)U=(P0​+P)×(r0​+R) and every policy π\piπ, Tπ,UT^{\pi,\mathcal U}Tπ,U has a unique fixed point vπ,Uv^{\pi,\mathcal U}vπ,U, and it is the optimal solution of

max⁡v∈RS⟨v,μ0⟩s.t.v(s)≤T(P0,r0)πv(s)−σRs(−πs)−σPs(−γv⋅πs)∀s∈S.(2)\max_{v\in\mathbb R^{\mathcal S}}\langle v,\mu_0\rangle\quad\text{s.t.}\quad v(s)\le T^\pi_{(P_0,r_0)}v(s)-\sigma_{\mathcal R_s}(-\pi_s)-\sigma_{\mathcal P_s}(-\gamma v\cdot\pi_s)\quad\forall s\in\mathcal S. \tag{2}v∈RSmax​⟨v,μ0​⟩s.t.v(s)≤T(P0​,r0​)π​v(s)−σRs​​(−πs​)−σPs​​(−γv⋅πs​)∀s∈S.(2)

Milestones

  1. Proposition 3.1. For any uncertainty set U=P×R\mathcal U = \mathcal P\times\mathcal RU=P×R with P\mathcal PP a nonempty compact set of kernels and R\mathcal RR a nonempty compact set of rewards, vπ,Uv^{\pi,\mathcal U}vπ,U is the optimal solution of the robust program \max_{v}\langle v,\mu_0\rangle\quad\text{s.t.}\quad v\le T^\pi_{(P,r)}v\ \ \forall(P,r)\in\mathcal U. \tag{$P_{\mathcal U}$}
  2. Theorem 3.1. For U={P0}×(r0+R)\mathcal U=\{P_0\}\times(r_0+\mathcal R)U={P0​}×(r0​+R), vπ,Uv^{\pi,\mathcal U}vπ,U is the optimal solution of max⁡v⟨v,μ0⟩\max_v\langle v,\mu_0\ranglemaxv​⟨v,μ0​⟩ s.t. v(s)≤T(P0,r0)πv(s)−σRs(−πs)v(s)\le T^\pi_{(P_0,r_0)}v(s)-\sigma_{\mathcal R_s}(-\pi_s)v(s)≤T(P0​,r0​)π​v(s)−σRs​​(−πs​) for all sss.
  3. Robust counterpart (proof of Theorem 4.1, App. B.1). For every vvv and sss,
max⁡(P,r)∈U{v(s)−rπ(s)−γPπv(s)}=σPs(−γv⋅πs)+σRs(−πs)+v(s)−T(P0,r0)πv(s).\max_{(P,r)\in\mathcal U}\{v(s)-r^\pi(s)-\gamma P^\pi v(s)\} = \sigma_{\mathcal P_s}(-\gamma v\cdot\pi_s)+\sigma_{\mathcal R_s}(-\pi_s)+v(s)-T^\pi_{(P_0,r_0)}v(s).(P,r)∈Umax​{v(s)−rπ(s)−γPπv(s)}=σPs​​(−γv⋅πs​)+σRs​​(−πs​)+v(s)−T(P0​,r0​)π​v(s).

Theorem 3.1 is the special case Ps={0}\mathcal P_s=\{0\}Ps​={0} of the goal; it is listed separately because it is the paper's statement that policy regularization is equivalent to reward uncertainty.

Significance

The goal says that a robust MDP with s-rectangular uncertainty in both reward and transitions is a regularized MDP on the nominal model, with two regularizers: a policy regularizer σRs(−πs)\sigma_{\mathcal R_s}(-\pi_s)σRs​​(−πs​) coming from reward uncertainty, and a regularizer σPs(−γv⋅πs)\sigma_{\mathcal P_s}(-\gamma v\cdot\pi_s)σPs​​(−γv⋅πs​) coming from transition uncertainty that depends on both the policy and the value. For ball-shaped sets these support functions are explicit (αsr∥πs∥\alpha^r_s\|\pi_s\|αsr​∥πs​∥ and αsPγ∥v∥∥πs∥\alpha^P_s\gamma\|v\|\|\pi_s\|αsP​γ∥v∥∥πs​∥, Corollary 4.1 of the paper), which leads to the twice regularized (R²) Bellman operators of Section 5 and to robust planning at the cost of non-robust planning. Theorem 3.1 also explains why standard policy regularizers (negative entropy, KL, Tsallis) yield robustness: each is the support function of a reward uncertainty set.

The results are proved in the paper (appendices A.1, A.2, B.1); none has a machine-checked proof. The mission produces formal statements and proofs of the equivalence, the robust Bellman operator's fixed-point theory for stochastic policies and general compact uncertainty sets, and a closed-form robust counterpart that later R² results can import. The paper's printed proof of Proposition 3.1 treats Tπ,UT^{\pi,\mathcal U}Tπ,U as linear in one step; a formal proof settles the statement independently of that step.

Difficulty

The obvious argument reads Proposition 3.1 as linear-programming duality, as for a single MDP. That fails: Tπ,UT^{\pi,\mathcal U}Tπ,U is a minimum of affine maps, hence concave and not affine, and the feasible set of (PU)(P_{\mathcal U})(PU​) is an intersection of infinitely many half-space systems; the argument has to go through monotonicity and contraction of Tπ,UT^{\pi,\mathcal U}Tπ,U, which in turn requires every model in U\mathcal UU to be a genuine transition kernel. For the goal, the paper invokes Fenchel–Rockafellar duality to evaluate the inner maximum; the work in Lean is to separate the maximum over the product set U\mathcal UU into per-state maxima, which needs the s-rectangular structure and attainment of every maximum (compactness), and to track the index order of the perturbation Ps(s′,a)P_s(s',a)Ps​(s′,a) against the kernel P(s′∣s,a)P(s'\mid s,a)P(s′∣s,a).

Formalization scope

  • States and actions are finite types, A nonempty; values are S → ℝ ordered pointwise; a transition array is P : S → A → S → ℝ with P s a s' =P(s′∣s,a)=P(s'\mid s,a)=P(s′∣s,a), and the kernel property is the published IsTransitionKernel; Pπ(s′∣s)P^\pi(s'\mid s)Pπ(s′∣s) is the published InducedTransition. A policy has π s ∈ stdSimplex ℝ A for every s.
  • Perturbations PsP_sPs​ are functions S × A → ℝ indexed (s′,a)(s',a)(s′,a), as in the paper's RX\mathbb R^{\mathcal X}RX; rewards perturbations are A → ℝ.
  • Minima and maxima (in Tπ,UT^{\pi,\mathcal U}Tπ,U and in σ\sigmaσ) are real sInf/sSup. Every theorem assumes the sets nonempty and compact, so these are attained; nothing is quantified over an unbounded set.
  • The robust value function is encoded as the fixed point of Tπ,UT^{\pi,\mathcal U}Tπ,U, and each theorem asserts its existence and uniqueness. The paper's definition vπ,U(s)=min⁡(P,r)∈Uv(P,r)π(s)v^{\pi,\mathcal U}(s)=\min_{(P,r)\in\mathcal U}v^\pi_{(P,r)}(s)vπ,U(s)=min(P,r)∈U​v(P,r)π​(s) (p. 4) coincides with it for rectangular sets by a cited result; the proofs use only the fixed-point property. For the non-rectangular sets of Proposition 3.1 the pointwise minimum can be strictly larger than the fixed point and is then not the optimum of (PU)(P_{\mathcal U})(PU​), so the fixed point is the object the proposition is true for.
  • "The optimal solution" means: feasible, objective-maximal, and the unique maximizer (uniqueness uses μ0>0\mu_0>0μ0​>0).
  • Disclosed hypotheses: U=P×R\mathcal U=\mathcal P\times\mathcal RU=P×R with P\mathcal PP, R\mathcal RR nonempty and compact and every transition in P\mathcal PP a kernel (Prop. 3.1); Ps\mathcal P_sPs​, Rs\mathcal R_sRs​ nonempty and compact and every perturbed row P0(⋅∣s,a)+Ps(⋅,a)P_0(\cdot\mid s,a)+P_s(\cdot,a)P0​(⋅∣s,a)+Ps​(⋅,a) in ΔS\Delta_{\mathcal S}ΔS​ (Thm 4.1); reward sets rectangular in Thm 3.1, as its proof uses. These are the robust-MDP standing assumptions of p. 4 (P⊆ΔSX\mathcal P\subseteq\Delta^{\mathcal X}_{\mathcal S}P⊆ΔSX​) and what makes "min" and "max" well defined.
  • Not drafted: Corollary 4.1, whose ℓ²-ball Ps\mathcal P_sPs​ contains perturbations that leave the simplex, so P0+PP_0+\mathcal PP0​+P is not a set of kernels; Corollary 3.1 and Proposition 3.2 (consequences after the goal; Prop. 3.2 depends on an unspecified policy parametrization).
  • A formalization that asserts only that the feasible sets of (PU)(P_{\mathcal U})(PU​) and (2) coincide, or that drops the kernel condition or the existence of the fixed point, does not count: the goal names the robust value function and its optimality.
  • "Convex" in the statement of Theorem 4.1 is descriptive and is not part of the formal goal.

Contributions welcome: the monotone-contraction fixed-point lemma for Tπ,UT^{\pi,\mathcal U}Tπ,U and the per-state separation of maxima over rectangular sets are reusable for any robust MDP mission.

Selected references

  • E. Derman, M. Geist, S. Mannor, Twice regularized MDPs and the equivalence between robustness and regularization, NeurIPS 2021. arXiv:2110.06267v1
  • G. N. Iyengar, Robust dynamic programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 30(2), 2005. doi:10.1287/moor.1040.0129
  • A. Nilim, L. El Ghaoui, Robust control of Markov decision processes with uncertain transition matrices, Operations Research 53(5), 2005. doi:10.1287/opre.1050.0216
  • W. Wiesemann, D. Kuhn, B. Rustem, Robust Markov decision processes, Mathematics of Operations Research 38(1), 2013. doi:10.1287/moor.1120.0566
  • M. Geist, B. Scherrer, O. Pietquin, A theory of regularized Markov decision processes, ICML 2019. PMLR 97
  • S. Mannor, D. Simester, P. Sun, J. N. Tsitsiklis, Bias and variance approximation in value function estimates, Management Science 53(2), 2007. doi:10.1287/mnsc.1060.0614
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
Machine LearningOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

SAGA: A Fast Incremental Gradient Method With Support for Non-Strongly Convex Composite Objectives I: Linear Convergence under Strong ConvexityResearch Paper

Motivation

Many problems in machine learning and statistics are finite sums: an empirical risk f(x)=1n∑i=1nfi(x)f(x)=\frac1n\sum_{i=1}^n f_i(x)f(x)=n1​∑i=1n​fi​(x) over nnn data points, often plus a regulariser hhh such as an ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ penalty. When nnn is large, a full gradient of fff costs nnn component gradients, while stochastic gradient descent uses one component per step but converges only sublinearly because its gradient estimate has non-vanishing variance. Incremental gradient methods with variance reduction keep the per-step cost of one component gradient and still converge linearly on strongly convex problems.

SAGA, introduced by Defazio, Bach and Lacoste-Julien at NIPS 2014 (arXiv:1407.0202), is one of the standard methods of this family, alongside SAG, SVRG, SDCA and Finito/MISO. It keeps a table of past component gradients and handles a non-smooth regulariser through its proximal operator.

Timeline. Le Roux, Schmidt and Bach (2012) gave SAG the first linear rate for strongly convex finite sums at the cost of one gradient per step. Shalev-Shwartz and Zhang (2013) proved linear rates for SDCA, a dual method. Johnson and Zhang (2013) introduced SVRG, with periodic full-gradient passes; Xiao and Zhang (2014) extended it to composite objectives (prox-SVRG). SAGA (2014) combines an unbiased SVRG-style estimator with a SAG-style table, and proves a linear rate in the composite strongly convex case with a simple Lyapunov argument.

Setting

Let Rd\mathbb R^dRd carry the Euclidean inner product. There are n≥1n\ge1n≥1 differentiable components f1,…,fn:Rd→Rf_1,\dots,f_n:\mathbb R^d\to\mathbb Rf1​,…,fn​:Rd→R with gradients fi′f_i'fi′​. Each fif_ifi​ is μ\muμ-strongly convex (μ>0\mu>0μ>0): fi(ax+by)≤afi(x)+bfi(y)−abμ2∥x−y∥2f_i(ax+by)\le af_i(x)+bf_i(y)-ab\frac\mu2\|x-y\|^2fi​(ax+by)≤afi​(x)+bfi​(y)−ab2μ​∥x−y∥2 for a,b≥0a,b\ge0a,b≥0, a+b=1a+b=1a+b=1. Each gradient is LLL-Lipschitz: ∥fi′(x)−fi′(y)∥≤L∥x−y∥\|f_i'(x)-f_i'(y)\|\le L\|x-y\|∥fi′​(x)−fi′​(y)∥≤L∥x−y∥. Write f=1n∑ifif=\frac1n\sum_i f_if=n1​∑i​fi​ and f′=1n∑ifi′f'=\frac1n\sum_i f_i'f′=n1​∑i​fi′​. The regulariser h:Rd→Rh:\mathbb R^d\to\mathbb Rh:Rd→R is convex, and the goal is to minimise the composite objective F=f+hF=f+hF=f+h; x∗x^*x∗ denotes its minimiser, which is unique.

The proximal operator with step γ>0\gamma>0γ>0 is

prox⁡γh(y)=argmin⁡x{h(x)+12γ∥x−y∥2}.\operatorname{prox}^h_\gamma(y)=\operatorname*{argmin}_{x}\Big\{h(x)+\tfrac1{2\gamma}\|x-y\|^2\Big\}.proxγh​(y)=xargmin​{h(x)+2γ1​∥x−y∥2}.

SAGA keeps an iterate xkx^kxk and points ϕ1k,…,ϕnk\phi_1^k,\dots,\phi_n^kϕ1k​,…,ϕnk​ at which the stored gradients fi′(ϕik)f_i'(\phi_i^k)fi′​(ϕik​) were taken. It starts from x0x^0x0 with ϕi0=x0\phi_i^0=x^0ϕi0​=x0. At iteration k+1k+1k+1 it draws jjj uniformly from {1,…,n}\{1,\dots,n\}{1,…,n}, independently of the past, and sets

wk+1=xk−γ[fj′(xk)−fj′(ϕjk)+1n∑i=1nfi′(ϕik)],xk+1=prox⁡γh(wk+1),w^{k+1}=x^k-\gamma\Big[f_j'(x^k)-f_j'(\phi_j^k)+\frac1n\sum_{i=1}^n f_i'(\phi_i^k)\Big],\qquad x^{k+1}=\operatorname{prox}^h_\gamma(w^{k+1}),wk+1=xk−γ[fj′​(xk)−fj′​(ϕjk​)+n1​i=1∑n​fi′​(ϕik​)],xk+1=proxγh​(wk+1),

then ϕjk+1=xk\phi_j^{k+1}=x^kϕjk+1​=xk, with every other entry unchanged.

The analysis uses the Lyapunov function

T(x,{ϕi})=1n∑ifi(ϕi)−f(x∗)−1n∑i⟨fi′(x∗),ϕi−x∗⟩+c∥x−x∗∥2.T(x,\{\phi_i\})=\frac1n\sum_i f_i(\phi_i)-f(x^*)-\frac1n\sum_i\langle f_i'(x^*),\phi_i-x^*\rangle+c\|x-x^*\|^2 .T(x,{ϕi​})=n1​i∑​fi​(ϕi​)−f(x∗)−n1​i∑​⟨fi′​(x∗),ϕi​−x∗⟩+c∥x−x∗∥2.

Formalization targets

Goal: Corollary 1 (p. 8)

With γ=12(μn+L)\gamma=\frac1{2(\mu n+L)}γ=2(μn+L)1​, for every k≥0k\ge0k≥0,

E∥xk−x∗∥2≤(1−μ2(μn+L))k[∥x0−x∗∥2+nμn+L(f(x0)−⟨f′(x∗),x0−x∗⟩−f(x∗))],\mathbb E\|x^k-x^*\|^2\le\Big(1-\frac{\mu}{2(\mu n+L)}\Big)^k\Big[\|x^0-x^*\|^2+\frac{n}{\mu n+L}\big(f(x^0)-\langle f'(x^*),x^0-x^*\rangle-f(x^*)\big)\Big],E∥xk−x∗∥2≤(1−2(μn+L)μ​)k[∥x0−x∗∥2+μn+Ln​(f(x0)−⟨f′(x∗),x0−x∗⟩−f(x∗))],

where the expectation is over the indices drawn in the first kkk iterations. The constants are the paper's.

Theorem 1 (p. 7)

With γ\gammaγ as above, c=12γ(1−γμ)nc=\frac1{2\gamma(1-\gamma\mu)n}c=2γ(1−γμ)n1​ and κ=1γμ\kappa=\frac1{\gamma\mu}κ=γμ1​, for every state (xk,{ϕik})(x^k,\{\phi^k_i\})(xk,{ϕik​}),

E[Tk+1]≤(1−1κ)Tk,\mathbb E\big[T^{k+1}\big]\le\Big(1-\frac1\kappa\Big)T^k ,E[Tk+1]≤(1−κ1​)Tk,

with the expectation over the next index only.

Supporting lemmas

Lemma 4 (p. 10), a lower bound combining strong convexity and smoothness; Lemma 1 (pp. 6–7), its average over the components; Lemma 2 (p. 7), which bounds the stale-gradient variance by the table part of TTT; and Lemma 3 (p. 7), a second-moment bound for the SAGA step.

Significance

The result. Corollary 1 gives an ε\varepsilonε-accurate iterate in expectation after O((n+L/μ)log⁡(1/ε))O\big((n+L/\mu)\log(1/\varepsilon)\big)O((n+L/μ)log(1/ε)) component-gradient evaluations. This is the complexity of full-gradient descent with the condition number decoupled from nnn, and it holds in the composite setting, so it covers the lasso and elastic-net problems that SAG's analysis does not reach. The paper notes that the rate improves on the published rates of SAG and SVRG and is within a factor 2 of SDCA's. Theorem 1 is the template of later Lyapunov analyses of variance-reduced methods.

Formalizing it. The result has been proved since 2014, and no machine-checked proof is known to this mission. The work left is to formalize the known proof: the convexity inequalities (Lemmas 4, 1, 2), the variance computation (Lemma 3), the one-step contraction (Theorem 1), and the passage from conditional to total expectation along the random index sequence (Corollary 1). The paper's Lemma 3 has a sign misprint, which the formalization corrects; see the scope section.

Difficulty

The obvious argument for SGD-type methods bounds E∥xk+1−x∗∥2\mathbb E\|x^{k+1}-x^*\|^2E∥xk+1−x∗∥2 in terms of ∥xk−x∗∥2\|x^k-x^*\|^2∥xk−x∗∥2 alone. That fails here: the variance of the SAGA estimator depends on the stale table points ϕik\phi_i^kϕik​, which can be far from x∗x^*x∗ even when xkx^kxk is close. One needs a potential that also measures the table. Balancing the terms of TTT then requires the four round-bracket coefficients in the paper's display (10) to be non-positive for the specific γ\gammaγ, ccc and an auxiliary β=(2μn+L)/L\beta=(2\mu n+L)/Lβ=(2μn+L)/L. Checking these coefficients is routine but long algebra in μ\muμ, LLL, nnn. The composite case adds one step: since f′(x∗)≠0f'(x^*)\neq0f′(x∗)=0 in general, the argument goes through the fixed-point identity x∗=prox⁡γh(x∗−γf′(x∗))x^*=\operatorname{prox}^h_\gamma(x^*-\gamma f'(x^*))x∗=proxγh​(x∗−γf′(x∗)) and the non-expansiveness of the proximal operator, neither of which is a numbered result of the paper.

Formalization scope

  • Space and data. The space is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d). Components are indexed by Fin n (0-based), with 0 < n. The gradients fi′f_i'fi′​ are given maps with HasGradientAt (f i) (f' i x) x. Strong convexity is Mathlib's StrongConvexOn Set.univ μ, whose modulus μ2∥x−y∥2\frac\mu2\|x-y\|^22μ​∥x−y∥2 is the paper's.

  • Regulariser and minimiser. hhh is real-valued and convex; extended-valued regularisers are out of scope, as on the page. A minimiser x∗x^*x∗ of f+hf+hf+h is a hypothesis.

  • Proximal operator. It is any map PPP such that P(y)P(y)P(y) minimises h(x)+12γ∥x−y∥2h(x)+\frac1{2\gamma}\|x-y\|^2h(x)+2γ1​∥x−y∥2 for every yyy (IsProxPoint). The minimiser is unique, so PPP is prox⁡γh\operatorname{prox}^h_\gammaproxγh​.

  • State and expectation. The state is the pair (x,ϕ)(x,\phi)(x,ϕ). The run after kkk steps is a deterministic function of the index sequence in Fin k → Fin n. The expectation in Corollary 1 is the average over all nkn^knk sequences, which is exactly the law of kkk independent uniform indices; no measure theory is involved. Theorem 1's conditional expectation is the average over the next index.

  • Constants and corrections. Constants are as printed and fixed, not "for some constant" and not "for all small enough steps". Lemma 4 carries the hypothesis μ<L\mu<Lμ<L, which its fractions 1/(L−μ)1/(L-\mu)1/(L−μ) require. Lemma 3 is stated with +γf′(x∗)+\gamma f'(x^*)+γf′(x∗), as in its proof and its use in Theorem 1; the printed −γf′(x∗)-\gamma f'(x^*)−γf′(x∗) is false whenever f′(x∗)≠0f'(x^*)\neq0f′(x∗)=0.

  • Trivializing formalizations, ruled out. Taking the proximal step as merely non-expansive, fixing an index sequence instead of averaging over all of them, measuring x∗x^*x∗ against fff instead of f+hf+hf+h, or restricting Theorem 1 to reachable states changes the theorem and is excluded.

  • Infrastructure. A complete development needs:

    • the co-coercivity inequality for convex functions with Lipschitz gradient;
    • existence, uniqueness and non-expansiveness of the proximal map of a finite convex function;
    • the optimality condition x∗=prox⁡γh(x∗−γf′(x∗))x^*=\operatorname{prox}^h_\gamma(x^*-\gamma f'(x^*))x∗=proxγh​(x∗−γf′(x∗));
    • finite-sum variance identities.

    These pieces are reusable well beyond SAGA, by SVRG, SAG and proximal-gradient analyses. Contributions of any of them, or of proofs of the individual milestones, are welcome.

Selected references

  • A. Defazio, F. Bach, S. Lacoste-Julien, SAGA: A Fast Incremental Gradient Method With Support for Non-Strongly Convex Composite Objectives, NIPS 2014. arXiv:1407.0202
  • N. Le Roux, M. Schmidt, F. Bach, A Stochastic Gradient Method with an Exponential Convergence Rate for Finite Training Sets, NIPS 2012. arXiv:1202.6258
  • R. Johnson, T. Zhang, Accelerating Stochastic Gradient Descent using Predictive Variance Reduction, NIPS 2013. NeurIPS proceedings
  • L. Xiao, T. Zhang, A Proximal Stochastic Gradient Method with Progressive Variance Reduction, SIAM J. Optim. 24(4), 2014. arXiv:1403.4699
  • S. Shalev-Shwartz, T. Zhang, Stochastic Dual Coordinate Ascent Methods for Regularized Loss Minimization, JMLR 14, 2013. arXiv:1209.1873
  • Y. Nesterov, Introductory Lectures on Convex Optimization, Kluwer, 2004. doi:10.1007/978-1-4419-8853-9
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
Linear algebraOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Nonlinear Programming Algorithm for Solving Semidefinite Programs via Low-rank Factorization: A Regular Local Minimum That Stays Locally Minimal After Adding a Zero Column Solves the SDPResearch Paper

Motivation

Semidefinite programs (SDPs) arise as convex relaxations of combinatorial problems such as maximum cut and the Lovász theta function, and in control and eigenvalue optimization. Interior-point methods solve them reliably but manipulate dense n×nn\times nn×n matrices, which limits the size of the instances they can handle. Burer and Monteiro (Math. Program. 95 (2003)) proposed replacing the matrix variable X⪰0X\succeq 0X⪰0 by a factorization X=RRTX=RR^{T}X=RRT with RRR having only rrr columns, and solving the resulting nonconvex program by a first-order augmented Lagrangian method. The approach rests on a theorem of Barvinok (1995) and Pataki (1998): an SDP with mmm linear constraints has an optimal solution of rank rrr with r(r+1)/2≤mr(r+1)/2\le mr(r+1)/2≤m, so a small number of columns suffices.

Because the factorized problem is nonconvex, a local minimum it returns is not automatically a solution of the SDP. Section 2 of the paper gives conditions under which it is. This mission formalizes those conditions, culminating in Proposition 2.5, which justifies the paper's strategy of increasing the rank one column at a time.

Setting

For real p×qp\times qp×q matrices, the trace inner product is A∙B=trace⁡(ATB)A\bullet B=\operatorname{trace}(A^{T}B)A∙B=trace(ATB). The data are symmetric matrices C,A1,…,Am∈SnC, A_1,\dots,A_m\in\mathcal S^nC,A1​,…,Am​∈Sn and a vector b∈Rmb\in\mathbb R^mb∈Rm. The primal SDP and dual SDP are

(1)min⁡{C∙X:Ai∙X=bi, i=1,…,m, X⪰0},(3)max⁡{bTy:S=C−∑i=1myiAi, S⪰0}.\text{(1)}\quad \min\{C\bullet X : A_i\bullet X=b_i,\ i=1,\dots,m,\ X\succeq0\},\qquad \text{(3)}\quad \max\Big\{b^{T}y : S=C-\sum_{i=1}^m y_iA_i,\ S\succeq0\Big\}.(1)min{C∙X:Ai​∙X=bi​, i=1,…,m, X⪰0},(3)max{bTy:S=C−i=1∑m​yi​Ai​, S⪰0}.

The standing assumptions of the paper are that A1,…,AmA_1,\dots,A_mA1​,…,Am​ are linearly independent and that there are feasible X∗X^*X∗ and (S∗,y∗)(S^*,y^*)(S∗,y∗) with C∙X∗=bTy∗C\bullet X^*=b^{T}y^*C∙X∗=bTy∗.

For a positive integer r≤nr\le nr≤n, the low-rank program is

(Nr)min⁡{C∙(RRT):Ai∙(RRT)=bi, i=1,…,m, R∈Rn×r}.(N_r)\qquad \min\{C\bullet(RR^{T}) : A_i\bullet(RR^{T})=b_i,\ i=1,\dots,m,\ R\in\mathbb R^{n\times r}\}.(Nr​)min{C∙(RRT):Ai​∙(RRT)=bi​, i=1,…,m, R∈Rn×r}.

Its Lagrangian is L(R,y)=C∙(RRT)−∑iyi(Ai∙(RRT)−bi)L(R,y)=C\bullet(RR^{T})-\sum_i y_i(A_i\bullet(RR^{T})-b_i)L(R,y)=C∙(RRT)−∑i​yi​(Ai​∙(RRT)−bi​), and S(y)=C−∑iyiAiS(y)=C-\sum_i y_iA_iS(y)=C−∑i​yi​Ai​. A feasible RRR is a local minimum if it minimizes the objective among nearby feasible points; it is a regular point if A1R,…,AmRA_1R,\dots,A_mRA1​R,…,Am​R are linearly independent; it is a stationary point with multiplier yyy if ∇RL(R,y)=0\nabla_RL(R,y)=0∇R​L(R,y)=0. The injection of R∈Rn×rR\in\mathbb R^{n\times r}R∈Rn×r is R^=[ R  0 ]∈Rn×(r+1)\hat R=[\,R\ \ 0\,]\in\mathbb R^{n\times(r+1)}R^=[R  0]∈Rn×(r+1), obtained by appending a zero column.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 2.5

Let r<nr<nr<n and let R∗R^*R∗ be a regular local minimum of (Nr)(N_r)(Nr​) with multiplier y∗y^*y∗, S∗=S(y∗)S^*=S(y^*)S∗=S(y∗), S∗R∗=0S^*R^*=0S∗R∗=0. If R^\hat RR^ is a local minimum of (Nr+1)(N_{r+1})(Nr+1​), then

X∗=R∗(R∗)T solves (1)and(S∗,y∗) solves (3).X^*=R^*(R^*)^{T}\ \text{solves (1)}\quad\text{and}\quad (S^*,y^*)\ \text{solves (3)}.X∗=R∗(R∗)T solves (1)and(S∗,y∗) solves (3).

Milestones

  1. The derivative formulas (9): ∇R(Ai∙(RRT)−bi)=2AiR\nabla_R(A_i\bullet(RR^T)-b_i)=2A_iR∇R​(Ai​∙(RRT)−bi​)=2Ai​R, ∇RL(R,y)=2SR\nabla_RL(R,y)=2SR∇R​L(R,y)=2SR, and LRR′′(R,y)[D,D]=2S∙(DDT)L''_{RR}(R,y)[D,D]=2S\bullet(DD^T)LRR′′​(R,y)[D,D]=2S∙(DDT).
  2. Proposition 2.3: at a regular local minimum of (Nr)(N_r)(Nr​) there is a unique y∗y^*y∗ with S∗R∗=0S^*R^*=0S∗R∗=0, and S∗∙(DDT)≥0S^*\bullet(DD^T)\ge0S∗∙(DDT)≥0 for every DDD with AiR∗∙D=0A_iR^*\bullet D=0Ai​R∗∙D=0 for all iii.
  3. Proposition 2.1: feasible XXX and (S,y)(S,y)(S,y) are simultaneously optimal if and only if X∙S=0X\bullet S=0X∙S=0.
  4. Proposition 2.4: a stationary point of (Nr)(N_r)(Nr​) whose S∗S^*S∗ is positive semidefinite gives optimal X∗=R∗R∗TX^*=R^*R^{*T}X∗=R∗R∗T and (S∗,y∗)(S^*,y^*)(S∗,y∗).

Significance

Proposition 2.5 is a certificate of global optimality for a nonconvex problem obtained from local information alone. It is the basis of the rank-increase scheme described on p. 8 of the paper: compute a local minimum of (Nr)(N_r)(Nr​) for a small rrr; if the zero-column extension is still a local minimum of (Nr+1)(N_{r+1})(Nr+1​), the current point solves the SDP; otherwise a better point of (Nr+1)(N_{r+1})(Nr+1​) exists and rrr is increased. Proposition 2.4 gives the companion test, valid for every rrr: positive semidefiniteness of the multiplier matrix at a stationary point. These statements underlie the later convergence analysis of the method (Burer & Monteiro 2005) and the literature on benign landscapes of low-rank SDP formulations (Boumal, Voroninski & Bandeira 2016).

The results are proved in the paper. What this mission adds is a machine-checked version of the full chain from the standard-form SDP to the rank-increase certificate, including the matrix calculus (9), the first- and second-order necessary conditions for an equality-constrained program over rectangular matrices, and SDP complementary slackness in standard form. No machine-checked proof of these results is recorded in Mathlib or on the platform.

Difficulty

The SDP side (Propositions 2.1 and 2.4) is linear algebra: weak duality and the fact that the trace inner product of two positive semidefinite matrices is nonnegative. The substance lies in Proposition 2.3. The feasible set of (Nr)(N_r)(Nr​) is a variety cut out by mmm quadratic equations, and the multiplier rule and, especially, the second-order necessary condition require a constraint qualification and a curve in the feasible set realizing every tangent direction. Mathlib provides a first-order Lagrange multiplier rule, but not the second-order condition on the tangent space. A naive attempt to read Proposition 2.5 off Proposition 2.4 fails: local minimality of R∗R^*R∗ alone does not make S∗S^*S∗ positive semidefinite (when rrr is below the minimal optimal rank, it is not); the hypothesis on (Nr+1)(N_{r+1})(Nr+1​) is indispensable.

Formalization scope

Matrices are Matrix (Fin n) (Fin r) ℝ with 0-based indices. The trace inner product is frob A B = trace(Aᵀ * B), defined for rectangular matrices. The data carry explicit symmetry hypotheses C.IsSymm and (A i).IsSymm; without them the formulas (9) are false. Primal feasibility uses Mathlib's PosSemidef, which over R\mathbb RR includes symmetry. Optimality for (1) and (3) is defined relative to their entire feasible sets. The standing assumptions are a separate predicate carried as a hypothesis by Propositions 2.1, 2.3, 2.4 and 2.5, and every statement about (Nr)(N_r)(Nr​) carries 0<r0<r0<r and r≤nr\le nr≤n (or r<nr<nr<n). Gradients are Fréchet derivatives under the Frobenius norm, identified with matrices through the trace inner product; local minima use IsLocalMinOn on the feasible set of (Nr)(N_r)(Nr​) together with feasibility. The injection appends the zero column as the last column.

The statement admits several trivializing encodings, all excluded here: optimality defined relative to the factorized feasible set instead of the whole SDP, an empty or unconstrained (Nr)(N_r)(Nr​) (an unconstrained local minimum or a local minimum without feasibility), a stationarity notion that already includes S⪰0S\succeq0S⪰0, and an injection other than the zero-column extension.

A complete development needs the matrix calculus of R↦RRTR\mapsto RR^{T}R↦RRT, a second-order necessary optimality condition under linear independence of the constraint gradients, and standard-form SDP weak duality and complementary slackness; all of these are reusable well beyond this mission. Proofs of individual milestones, in particular the derivative formulas and Proposition 2.4, are welcome independently of the goal.

Selected references

  • S. Burer and R. D. C. Monteiro, A nonlinear programming algorithm for solving semidefinite programs via low-rank factorization, Mathematical Programming 95 (2003), 329–357. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-002-0352-8 (statements cited from the authors' manuscript of March 9, 2001)
  • A. Barvinok, Problems of distance geometry and convex properties of quadratic maps, Discrete & Computational Geometry 13 (1995), 189–202. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02574037
  • G. Pataki, On the rank of extreme matrices in semidefinite programs and the multiplicity of optimal eigenvalues, Mathematics of Operations Research 23 (1998), 339–358. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.23.2.339
  • R. D. C. Monteiro and M. Todd, Path-following methods for semidefinite programming, in Handbook of Semidefinite Programming, Kluwer, 2000 (source of Proposition 2.1).
  • S. Burer and R. D. C. Monteiro, Local minima and convergence in low-rank semidefinite programming, Mathematical Programming 103 (2005), 427–444. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-004-0564-1
  • N. Boumal, V. Voroninski and A. S. Bandeira, The non-convex Burer–Monteiro approach works on smooth semidefinite programs, NeurIPS 2016. https://arxiv.org/abs/1606.04970
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
Bandit AlgorithmsMachine LearningOperations Research+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Regret Analysis of Stochastic and Nonstochastic Multi-armed Bandit Problems V: Bandit Convex Optimization with One-Point FeedbackTextbook

Motivation

In bandit convex optimization a forecaster repeatedly picks a point xtx_txt​ of a convex set K⊆Rd\mathcal K\subseteq\mathbb R^dK⊆Rd, and an adversary picks a convex loss ℓt\ell_tℓt​. The forecaster pays ℓt(xt)\ell_t(x_t)ℓt​(xt​) and observes only that number: it never sees the function, its gradient, or its value elsewhere. This is the model of online optimization with only function-value access, as in tuning a system online from measured costs, dynamic pricing with an unknown convex demand-cost curve, or routing with path costs observed only on the route taken. The question is how fast the forecaster can approach the best fixed point in hindsight.

Chapter 6 of Bubeck and Cesa-Bianchi's monograph (arXiv:1204.5721v2, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 5(1), 2012) treats the problem through spherical gradient estimates fed to projected gradient descent. The one-point method is due to Flaxman, Kalai and McMahan (SODA 2005, arXiv:cs/0408007), who obtained an O(n3/4)\mathcal O(n^{3/4})O(n3/4) regret bound. Agarwal, Dekel and Xiao (COLT 2010) showed that two function evaluations per round allow O(n)\mathcal O(\sqrt n)O(n​). Whether one-point feedback admits n\sqrt nn​ regret was open when the monograph was written (p. 94); Bubeck, Eldan and Lee (STOC 2017, arXiv:1607.03084) later obtained n\sqrt nn​ regret up to logarithmic and polynomial-in-ddd factors for convex losses, with a different and much more involved algorithm.

Setting

Let B={x∈Rd:∥x∥≤1}\mathbb B=\{x\in\mathbb R^d:\|x\|\le1\}B={x∈Rd:∥x∥≤1} be the closed Euclidean unit ball and S={x:∥x∥=1}\mathbb S=\{x:\|x\|=1\}S={x:∥x∥=1} the unit sphere, with unnormalized spherical measure σ\sigmaσ, so that σ(S)=d Vol(B)\sigma(\mathbb S)=d\,\mathrm{Vol}(\mathbb B)σ(S)=dVol(B). Fix δ>0\delta>0δ>0. For a loss ℓ\ellℓ, the smoothed loss is ℓ~(x)=E ℓ(x+δB)\widetilde\ell(x)=\mathbb E\,\ell(x+\delta B)ℓ(x)=Eℓ(x+δB) with BBB uniform on B\mathbb BB.

The set K\mathcal KK is closed and convex with rB⊆K⊆RBr\mathbb B\subseteq\mathcal K\subseteq R\mathbb BrB⊆K⊆RB. The losses ℓ1,ℓ2,⋯:Rd→R\ell_1,\ell_2,\dots:\mathbb R^d\to\mathbb Rℓ1​,ℓ2​,⋯:Rd→R are GGG-Lipschitz, differentiable and convex, and are fixed before the game (an oblivious adversary).

OSGD (Online Stochastic Gradient Descent) on a set K′\mathcal K'K′ with learning rate η\etaη starts at x1=0x_1=0x1​=0 and sets xt+1=argmin⁡y∈K′∥y−(xt−ηg~t(xt))∥x_{t+1}=\operatorname{argmin}_{y\in\mathcal K'}\|y-(x_t-\eta\widetilde g_t(x_t))\|xt+1​=argminy∈K′​∥y−(xt​−ηg​t​(xt​))∥, where g~t\widetilde g_tg​t​ is a gradient estimate. With S1,S2,…S_1,S_2,\dotsS1​,S2​,… independent and uniform on S\mathbb SS:

  • the two-point estimate (6.1) is g~t(xt)=d2δ(ℓt(Xt+)−ℓt(Xt−))St\widetilde g_t(x_t)=\frac d{2\delta}\big(\ell_t(X_t^+)-\ell_t(X_t^-)\big)S_tg​t​(xt​)=2δd​(ℓt​(Xt+​)−ℓt​(Xt−​))St​ with Xt±=xt±δStX_t^\pm=x_t\pm\delta S_tXt±​=xt​±δSt​; the played point is Xt+X_t^+Xt+​ or Xt−X_t^-Xt−​ by a fair coin;
  • the one-point estimate (6.3) is g~t(xt)=dδ ℓt(X~t)St\widetilde g_t(x_t)=\frac d\delta\,\ell_t(\widetilde X_t)S_tg​t​(xt​)=δd​ℓt​(Xt​)St​ with played point X~t=xt+δSt\widetilde X_t=x_t+\delta S_tXt​=xt​+δSt​.

OSGD runs on the shrunken set K′=(1−δ/r)K\mathcal K'=(1-\delta/r)\mathcal KK′=(1−δ/r)K, so that the perturbed points stay in K\mathcal KK. The pseudo-regret is

R‾n=E∑t=1nℓt(X~t)−min⁡x∈K∑t=1nℓt(x).\overline R_n=\mathbb E\sum_{t=1}^n\ell_t(\widetilde X_t)-\min_{x\in\mathcal K}\sum_{t=1}^n\ell_t(x).Rn​=Et=1∑n​ℓt​(Xt​)−x∈Kmin​t=1∑n​ℓt​(x).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.2, tuned

If in addition ∣ℓt∣≤L|\ell_t|\le L∣ℓt​∣≤L on K\mathcal KK, and δ=(2n)−1/4RdL/((3+R/r)G)\delta=(2n)^{-1/4}\sqrt{RdL/((3+R/r)G)}δ=(2n)−1/4RdL/((3+R/r)G)​, η=(2n)−3/4R3/(dL(3+R/r)G)\eta=(2n)^{-3/4}\sqrt{R^3/(dL(3+R/r)G)}η=(2n)−3/4R3/(dL(3+R/r)G)​, then one-point OSGD satisfies

R‾n≤4n3/4RdL (3+R/r) G.\overline R_n\le 4n^{3/4}\sqrt{RdL\,(3+R/r)\,G}.Rn​≤4n3/4RdL(3+R/r)G​.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 6.1: ∇∫Bℓ(x+δb) db=1δ∫Sℓ(x+δs)s dσ(s)\nabla\int_{\mathbb B}\ell(x+\delta b)\,db=\frac1\delta\int_{\mathbb S}\ell(x+\delta s)s\,d\sigma(s)∇∫B​ℓ(x+δb)db=δ1​∫S​ℓ(x+δs)sdσ(s).
  2. Lemma 6.2: dδE[ℓ(x+δS)S]=∇E ℓ(x+δB)\frac d\delta\mathbb E[\ell(x+\delta S)S]=\nabla\mathbb E\,\ell(x+\delta B)δd​E[ℓ(x+δS)S]=∇Eℓ(x+δB).
  3. Eq. (6.2): ∣ℓ(x)−ℓ~(x)∣≤δG|\ell(x)-\widetilde\ell(x)|\le\delta G∣ℓ(x)−ℓ(x)∣≤δG.
  4. Lemma 6.3: the queried points' regret against xxx is at most the smoothed regret of the iterates against (1−ξ)x(1-\xi)x(1−ξ)x, plus 3δGn+ξGRn3\delta Gn+\xi GRn3δGn+ξGRn.
  5. Theorem 6.1: two-point OSGD has R‾n≤R2/η+η(Gd)2n+δ(3+R/r)Gn\overline R_n\le R^2/\eta+\eta(Gd)^2n+\delta(3+R/r)GnRn​≤R2/η+η(Gd)2n+δ(3+R/r)Gn, and R‾n≤2RGdn+δ(3+R/r)Gn\overline R_n\le 2RGd\sqrt n+\delta(3+R/r)GnRn​≤2RGdn​+δ(3+R/r)Gn for η=R/(Gdn)\eta=R/(Gd\sqrt n)η=R/(Gdn​).
  6. Theorem 6.2, first display: one-point OSGD has R‾n≤R2/η+(dL)2δ2ηn+δ(3+R/r)Gn\overline R_n\le R^2/\eta+\frac{(dL)^2}{\delta^2}\eta n+\delta(3+R/r)GnRn​≤R2/η+δ2(dL)2​ηn+δ(3+R/r)Gn for every 0<δ≤r0<\delta\le r0<δ≤r and η>0\eta>0η>0.

Significance

The n3/4n^{3/4}n3/4 bound shows that a single function value per round suffices for sublinear regret against any oblivious sequence of Lipschitz convex losses, with a forecaster whose only operations are a random perturbation and a Euclidean projection. The smoothing identity of Lemmas 6.1–6.2 is the basic tool of zeroth-order (derivative-free) optimization, used well beyond bandits, and Theorem 6.1 is the n\sqrt nn​ benchmark for two-point methods.

All results are proved in the source. To the best of current knowledge none is formalized: the related items of the Introduction to Online Convex Optimization series on Prove2Me (Hazan's Lemma 6.7 and Theorem 6.9) were formalized with missing hypotheses and are recorded as disproved. This mission produces machine-checked statements with every hypothesis explicit, and the formal infrastructure (sphere measure calculus, a projected stochastic gradient analysis) for later zeroth-order results.

Difficulty

Two steps resist a direct formal treatment. First, Lemma 6.1 is a divergence-theorem identity on the ball; Mathlib has the sphere measure and polar coordinates, but its divergence theorem covers boxes rather than balls, so differentiating the ball average in xxx requires either such a theorem or a direct argument about translates of the ball. Second, the regret analysis takes expectations of quantities that depend on the whole past: the iterate xtx_txt​ is a function of S1,…,St−1S_1,\dots,S_{t-1}S1​,…,St−1​, and unbiasedness E[g~t∣xt]=∇ℓ~t(xt)\mathbb E[\widetilde g_t\mid x_t]=\nabla\widetilde\ell_t(x_t)E[g​t​∣xt​]=∇ℓt​(xt​) holds only conditionally, via independence of StS_tSt​ from the past. A pathwise gradient-descent inequality must be combined with this conditional expectation round by round, with measurability of the projected iterates established along the way. The naive approach of treating the estimate as the true gradient of ℓt\ell_tℓt​ fails: it is a gradient of ℓ~t\widetilde\ell_tℓt​, and the gap is handled only by Eq. (6.2) and Lemma 6.3.

Formalization scope

Points are in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d) with d≥1d\ge1d≥1; rounds are t=1,2,…t=1,2,\dotst=1,2,…, sums run over Finset.Icc 1 n. σ\sigmaσ is Mathlib's Measure.toSphere of Lebesgue measure; the uniform laws are normalized restrictions. Randomness lives on an arbitrary probability space; the directions StS_tSt​ are measurable, mutually independent (iIndepFun) and uniform on S\mathbb SS, and in Theorem 6.1 the pairs (St,Ct)(S_t,C_t)(St​,Ct​) are independent with CtC_tCt​ a fair sign independent of StS_tSt​. A run of OSGD is a predicate (start at 000, each iterate a Euclidean projection onto (1−δ/r)K(1-\delta/r)\mathcal K(1−δ/r)K), which determines the run uniquely, so the forecaster uses only observed values and its own randomness. The losses are Lipschitz, differentiable and convex on all of Rd\mathbb R^dRd; the bound ∣ℓt∣≤L|\ell_t|\le L∣ℓt​∣≤L is on K\mathcal KK, because a convex function bounded on Rd\mathbb R^dRd is constant. The minimum over K\mathcal KK is an infimum over the subtype K\mathcal KK, attained in every theorem.

Conventions and corrections, each stated in the item's Formalization Note:

  • Lemma 6.1 carries the factor 1/δ1/\delta1/δ that the printed statement omits and the proof contains (corrected misprint).
  • Theorem 6.1's second display prints η=R/(GDn)\eta=R/(GD\sqrt n)η=R/(GDn​) and a limit "for δ→0\delta\to0δ→0"; the item states R‾n≤2RGdn+δ(3+R/r)Gn\overline R_n\le 2RGd\sqrt n+\delta(3+R/r)GnRn​≤2RGdn​+δ(3+R/r)Gn for η=R/(Gdn)\eta=R/(Gd\sqrt n)η=R/(Gdn​) and every admissible δ\deltaδ, which implies the limit (corrected misprint).
  • Theorems 6.1 and 6.2 add 0<δ≤r0<\delta\le r0<δ≤r, which the proofs need for Xt±,X~t∈KX_t^\pm,\widetilde X_t\in\mathcal KXt±​,Xt​∈K; for the tuned δ\deltaδ of the goal it is a condition on nnn.
  • The goal adds G,L>0G,L>0G,L>0 and n≥1n\ge1n≥1, which its formulas for δ,η\delta,\etaδ,η need; the constant 444 is the book's rounding of 2⋅23/42\cdot2^{3/4}2⋅23/4 and is kept, as is the form R2/ηR^2/\etaR2/η.

The statements cannot be satisfied trivially: the run is pinned by its recursion, the losses are fixed before the randomness, the expectations are of bounded measurable functions (no zero-valued Bochner integrals), and the minimum is over the nonempty compact K\mathcal KK. Section 6.3 (Lemma 6.4, Theorem 6.3) is not included, because its algorithm box and proof use different stage lengths and its unimodality condition is stated on a smaller set than the proof uses.

Needed infrastructure: calculus of ball averages and sphere integrals, symmetry of the uniform sphere law, nonexpansiveness of projections onto closed convex sets, and conditional-expectation bookkeeping for adapted iterates. Each is reusable for zeroth-order optimization; contributions of any of them as separate lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • S. Bubeck, N. Cesa-Bianchi, Regret Analysis of Stochastic and Nonstochastic Multi-armed Bandit Problems, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 5(1), 2012. arXiv:1204.5721v2, doi:10.1561/2200000024
  • A. Flaxman, A. Kalai, H. B. McMahan, Online convex optimization in the bandit setting: gradient descent without a gradient, SODA 2005. arXiv:cs/0408007
  • A. Agarwal, O. Dekel, L. Xiao, Optimal algorithms for online convex optimization with multi-point bandit feedback, COLT 2010. link
  • S. Bubeck, R. Eldan, Y. T. Lee, Kernel-based methods for bandit convex optimization, STOC 2017. arXiv:1607.03084
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
OptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

The Entropic Barrier: A Simple and Optimal Universal Self-Concordant Barrier: The Entropic Barrier of a Convex Body in ℝⁿ Is a (1 + εₙ)n-Self-Concordant Barrier with εₙ ≤ 100√(log n / n)Research Paper

Motivation

Interior-point methods minimize a linear function x↦⟨c,x⟩x\mapsto\langle c,x\ranglex↦⟨c,x⟩ over a convex set K⊂Rn\mathcal K\subset\mathbb R^nK⊂Rn by following the minimizers of ⟨c,x⟩+1tg(x)\langle c,x\rangle+\frac1t g(x)⟨c,x⟩+t1​g(x) as t→∞t\to\inftyt→∞, where ggg is a self-concordant barrier for K\mathcal KK. Each Newton step of such a method shrinks 1/t1/t1/t by a factor 1−1/ν1-1/\sqrt\nu1−1/ν​, where ν\nuν is the self-concordance parameter of ggg, so ν\nuν controls the iteration count of every interior-point method built on ggg (Nesterov and Nemirovski 1994; Nesterov 2004).

Timeline:

  • 1994. Nesterov and Nemirovski construct the universal barrier for any convex body and show it is a ν\nuν-self-concordant barrier with ν≤Cn\nu\le Cnν≤Cn for a universal constant CCC. They also show that ν≥n\nu\ge nν≥n is necessary for some bodies (the simplex, the cube).
  • 2014–2015. Hildebrand (Math. Oper. Res. 2014) and Fox (Ann. Mat. Pura Appl. 2015) show that the canonical barrier of a convex cone has parameter equal to the dimension, which gives parameter n+1n+1n+1 for convex bodies.
  • 2015. Bubeck and Eldan (arXiv:1412.1587, COLT 2015) show that the Fenchel dual of the log-Laplace transform of the uniform measure on K\mathcal KK, which they call the entropic barrier, is a (1+o(1))n(1+o(1))n(1+o(1))n-self-concordant barrier, with an explicit o(1)o(1)o(1) term.

Beyond optimization, the entropic barrier is the mirror map that pairs naturally with the exponential-family sampling scheme in bandit linear optimization, which the paper discusses in its §3.1.

Setting

Let K⊂Rn\mathcal K\subset\mathbb R^nK⊂Rn be a convex body: compact, convex, with non-empty interior int⁡(K)\operatorname{int}(\mathcal K)int(K). The log-Laplace transform of K\mathcal KK is

f(θ)=log⁡(∫x∈Kexp⁡(⟨θ,x⟩) dx),θ∈Rn,f(\theta)=\log\left(\int_{x\in\mathcal K}\exp(\langle\theta,x\rangle)\,dx\right),\qquad\theta\in\mathbb R^n,f(θ)=log(∫x∈K​exp(⟨θ,x⟩)dx),θ∈Rn,

and the entropic barrier is its Fenchel dual

f∗(x)=sup⁡θ∈Rn ⟨θ,x⟩−f(θ),x∈int⁡(K).f^*(x)=\sup_{\theta\in\mathbb R^n}\ \langle\theta,x\rangle-f(\theta),\qquad x\in\operatorname{int}(\mathcal K).f∗(x)=θ∈Rnsup​ ⟨θ,x⟩−f(θ),x∈int(K).

For a function g:int⁡(K)→Rg:\operatorname{int}(\mathcal K)\to\mathbb Rg:int(K)→R write ∇g(x)[h]\nabla g(x)[h]∇g(x)[h], ∇2g(x)[h,h]\nabla^2g(x)[h,h]∇2g(x)[h,h], ∇3g(x)[h,h,h]\nabla^3g(x)[h,h,h]∇3g(x)[h,h,h] for its directional derivatives. Following Definition 1 of the paper:

  1. ggg is a barrier for K\mathcal KK if g(x)→+∞g(x)\to+\inftyg(x)→+∞ as x→∂Kx\to\partial\mathcal Kx→∂K;
  2. a C3C^3C3 convex ggg is self-concordant if ∇3g(x)[h,h,h]≤2(∇2g(x)[h,h])3/2\nabla^3g(x)[h,h,h]\le2(\nabla^2g(x)[h,h])^{3/2}∇3g(x)[h,h,h]≤2(∇2g(x)[h,h])3/2 for all x∈int⁡(K)x\in\operatorname{int}(\mathcal K)x∈int(K), h∈Rnh\in\mathbb R^nh∈Rn;
  3. it is ν\nuν-self-concordant if moreover ∇g(x)[h]≤ν⋅∇2g(x)[h,h]\nabla g(x)[h]\le\sqrt{\nu\cdot\nabla^2g(x)[h,h]}∇g(x)[h]≤ν⋅∇2g(x)[h,h]​ for all such x,hx,hx,h.

The proof works with the canonical exponential family pθp_\thetapθ​, the probability measure with density exp⁡(⟨θ,x⟩−f(θ))1{x∈K}\exp(\langle\theta,x\rangle-f(\theta))\mathbb 1\{x\in\mathcal K\}exp(⟨θ,x⟩−f(θ))1{x∈K}, its mean x(θ)x(\theta)x(θ), covariance Σ(θ)\Sigma(\theta)Σ(θ) and third central moment T(θ)T(\theta)T(θ); with Y=⟨θ/∥θ∥,X⟩Y=\langle\theta/\|\theta\|,X\rangleY=⟨θ/∥θ∥,X⟩ for X∼pθX\sim p_\thetaX∼pθ​ and its density ρ\rhoρ; and with the section marginal λ(y)=Voln−1(K∩{yθ/∥θ∥+θ⊥})/Vol(K)\lambda(y)=\mathrm{Vol}_{n-1}(\mathcal K\cap\{y\theta/\|\theta\|+\theta^\perp\})/\mathrm{Vol}(\mathcal K)λ(y)=Voln−1​(K∩{yθ/∥θ∥+θ⊥})/Vol(K).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1

For every n≥80n\ge80n≥80 and every convex body K⊂Rn\mathcal K\subset\mathbb R^nK⊂Rn, f∗f^*f∗ is a ν\nuν-self-concordant barrier for K\mathcal KK with

ν=(1+εn) n,εn=100log⁡nn.\nu=(1+\varepsilon_n)\,n,\qquad\varepsilon_n=100\sqrt{\frac{\log n}{n}}.ν=(1+εn​)n,εn​=100nlogn​​.

Milestones, in attack order

  1. Lemma 1 (p. 5): strict convexity of fff, f∗f^*f∗; ∇f∗:int⁡(K)→Rn\nabla f^*:\operatorname{int}(\mathcal K)\to\mathbb R^n∇f∗:int(K)→Rn is a bijection; ∇2f=Σ\nabla^2f=\Sigma∇2f=Σ, ∇3f=T\nabla^3f=T∇3f=T (eqs. (4)–(5)); ∇2f∗(x)=Σ(θ(x))−1\nabla^2f^*(x)=\Sigma(\theta(x))^{-1}∇2f∗(x)=Σ(θ(x))−1 (eq. (6)).
  2. f∗f^*f∗ is a barrier (§4, p. 6).
  3. Lemma 2 (p. 7): EX3≤2(EX2)3/2\mathbb EX^3\le2(\mathbb EX^2)^{3/2}EX3≤2(EX2)3/2 for a real centered log-concave XXX; its consequence Epθ⟨X−x(θ),h⟩3≤2(Epθ⟨X−x(θ),h⟩2)3/2\mathbb E_{p_\theta}\langle X-x(\theta),h\rangle^3\le2(\mathbb E_{p_\theta}\langle X-x(\theta),h\rangle^2)^{3/2}Epθ​​⟨X−x(θ),h⟩3≤2(Epθ​​⟨X−x(θ),h⟩2)3/2; f∗f^*f∗ is self-concordant (§4, pp. 6–7).
  4. Reduction of (3) (p. 7): f∗f^*f∗ satisfies (3) with parameter ν\nuν iff ⟨Σ(θ)θ,θ⟩≤ν\langle\Sigma(\theta)\theta,\theta\rangle\le\nu⟨Σ(θ)θ,θ⟩≤ν for all θ\thetaθ.
  5. λ\lambdaλ is nnn-concave on its support (p. 9) and Lemma 5 (p. 9): φ\varphiφ is nnn-concave iff (log⁡φ)′′≤−1n((log⁡φ)′)2(\log\varphi)''\le-\frac1n((\log\varphi)')^2(logφ)′′≤−n1​((logφ)′)2.
  6. Lemma 3 (p. 8): ρ(y+y0)=ρ(y0)ζ(y)e−y2/(2σ2)\rho(y+y_0)=\rho(y_0)\zeta(y)e^{-y^2/(2\sigma^2)}ρ(y+y0​)=ρ(y0​)ζ(y)e−y2/(2σ2) on [−M,M][-M,M][−M,M], with ζ∈[0,1]\zeta\in[0,1]ζ∈[0,1] unimodal, M=7nlog⁡n/∥θ∥M=\sqrt{7n\log n}/\|\theta\|M=7nlogn​/∥θ∥, σ2=n∥θ∥211−7log⁡(n)/n\sigma^2=\frac{n}{\|\theta\|^2}\frac{1}{1-\sqrt{7\log(n)/n}}σ2=∥θ∥2n​1−7log(n)/n​1​; and its consequence (9): E(∣Y−y0∣2∣∣Y−y0∣≤M)≤σ2\mathbb E(|Y-y_0|^2\mid|Y-y_0|\le M)\le\sigma^2E(∣Y−y0​∣2∣∣Y−y0​∣≤M)≤σ2.
  7. Lemma 4 (p. 8): (1−2c(ε)εlog⁡2(1/ε))Var(X)≤∫x1x2(x−x0)2λ(x)dx≤E(∣X−x0∣2∣X∈[x1,x2])(1-2c(\varepsilon)\varepsilon\log^2(1/\varepsilon))\mathrm{Var}(X)\le\int_{x_1}^{x_2}(x-x_0)^2\lambda(x)dx\le\mathbb E(|X-x_0|^2\mid X\in[x_1,x_2])(1−2c(ε)εlog2(1/ε))Var(X)≤∫x1​x2​​(x−x0​)2λ(x)dx≤E(∣X−x0​∣2∣X∈[x1​,x2​]) for log-concave XXX.
  8. (7) (p. 7): Var(Y)≤n∥θ∥2(1+εn)\mathrm{Var}(Y)\le\frac{n}{\|\theta\|^2}(1+\varepsilon_n)Var(Y)≤∥θ∥2n​(1+εn​).

Significance

The result. Theorem 1 gives, for every convex body, an explicit barrier whose parameter is nnn up to a second-order term, against the CnCnCn of the universal barrier, and it is optimal up to that term because ν≥n\nu\ge nν≥n is necessary for some bodies. The barrier is defined by a single formula, its derivatives are moments of an explicit probability measure, and its parameter bound reduces to a variance bound for one-dimensional log-concave marginals. Lemmas 2 and 4 are self-contained facts about log-concave laws on R\mathbb RR (a sharp third-moment bound and a variance-localization bound) that are usable outside this paper.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper; nothing here is formalized elsewhere. The platform has a definition of self-concordance (reused here) and results for given self-concordant functions, but no universal or entropic barrier, no exponential family over a convex body, and no moment bounds for log-concave laws. A complete development produces machine-checked versions of the duality facts of Lemma 1, of the two log-concave lemmas, and of the Brunn–Minkowski consequence for section volumes. Two steps of the paper are sketched rather than proved in full: the end of the proof of Lemma 2 ("We omit further details of this proof", p. 12) and, in Lemma 4, a normalization step that cites a lemma stated for isotropic densities. A formal proof either fills or replaces them.

Difficulty

Self-concordance of f∗f^*f∗ reduces to self-concordance of fff by a general duality fact, and that reduces to Lemma 2; the difficulty there is the sharp constant 222, since generic moment comparisons for log-concave laws give a worse constant. The parameter bound is the hard part. The obvious bound ⟨Σ(θ)θ,θ⟩≤Cn\langle\Sigma(\theta)\theta,\theta\rangle\le Cn⟨Σ(θ)θ,θ⟩≤Cn follows from standard concentration for log-concave measures, but any argument that loses a constant factor proves only the 1994 result. The 1+o(1)1+o(1)1+o(1) requires the one-dimensional marginal of the tilted measure to be compared with a Gaussian of variance n/∥θ∥2n/\|\theta\|^2n/∥θ∥2 to within a factor 1+O(log⁡n/n)1+O(\sqrt{\log n/n})1+O(logn/n​), using the fact that λ\lambdaλ is nnn-concave and not merely log-concave. The paper does this pointwise near the mode (Lemma 3) and controls the tails separately (Lemma 4). The pointwise argument assumes ρ\rhoρ smooth, which holds for smooth bodies, and an approximation argument passes to general convex bodies.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), so nnn is the dimension, not a separate parameter. A convex body is compact, convex, with non-empty interior; a lower-dimensional set is excluded, which rules out a formalization in which the barrier and self-concordance clauses hold vacuously.

  • f∗f^*f∗ is a real supremum. On int⁡(K)\operatorname{int}(\mathcal K)int(K) it is the true supremum; elsewhere Lean returns a junk value that no statement reads. The barrier property is a limit within int⁡(K)\operatorname{int}(\mathcal K)int(K) at every frontier point.

  • Self-concordance (2) is the published ConvexOptimization.IsSelfConcordantOn on interior K, stated by line restrictions with an absolute value. It is equivalent to (2), because h↦−hh\mapsto-hh↦−h flips the sign of the third derivative.

  • The goal states the parameter as the explicit number ν=(1+100log⁡(n)/n) n\nu=(1+100\sqrt{\log(n)/n})\,nν=(1+100log(n)/n​)n. The page says εn≤100log⁡(n)/n\varepsilon_n\le100\sqrt{\log(n)/n}εn​≤100log(n)/n​, and (3) is monotone in ν\nuν, so this is the same claim. An existential ν\nuν is not used.

  • Corrections and implicit hypotheses:

    • Lemma 4 is stated for 0<ε<10<\varepsilon<10<ε<1. The page says ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0, but the statement is false for ε≥1\varepsilon\ge1ε≥1 and the paper applies it only with ε<1\varepsilon<1ε<1.
    • Lemma 5 assumes φ>0\varphi>0φ>0, which is implicit in ζ=log⁡φ\zeta=\log\varphiζ=logφ.
    • The reduction of (3) assumes ν≥0\nu\ge0ν≥0.
    • Lemma 3 and (9) carry the smoothness of ρ\rhoρ (the paper's own without-loss-of-generality step on p. 7) as a hypothesis, and the theorem's range n≥80n\ge80n≥80.
  • Section volumes use Mathlib's unnormalized (n−1)(n-1)(n−1)-dimensional Hausdorff measure. The normalization constant cancels in ρ\rhoρ and does not affect nnn-concavity. λ\lambdaλ and ρ\rhoρ are fixed pointwise functions, because Lemma 3 evaluates ρ\rhoρ at a maximizer.

  • Log-concavity on R\mathbb RR is the published ConvexOptimization.LogConcaveOn on the whole line.

  • Needed infrastructure that is reusable beyond this mission:

    • differentiation under the integral sign for exponential families on compact sets;
    • Fenchel duality for smooth strictly convex functions;
    • Brunn's concavity theorem for sections of convex bodies;
    • moment and tail bounds for log-concave densities on R\mathbb RR.

    Contributions to any of these, or proofs of single milestones, are welcome.

Selected references

  • S. Bubeck, R. Eldan, The entropic barrier: a simple and optimal universal self-concordant barrier, COLT 2015; arXiv:1412.1587v3. https://arxiv.org/abs/1412.1587
  • Y. Nesterov, A. Nemirovski, Interior-Point Polynomial Algorithms in Convex Programming, SIAM, 1994. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611970791
  • Y. Nesterov, Introductory Lectures on Convex Optimization: A Basic Course, Kluwer, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4419-8853-9
  • R. Hildebrand, Canonical barriers on convex cones, Mathematics of Operations Research 39:841–850, 2014.
  • D. Fox, A Schwarz lemma for Kähler affine metrics and the canonical potential of a proper convex cone, Annali di Matematica Pura ed Applicata 194:1–42, 2015.
  • B. Klartag, On convex perturbations with a bounded isotropic constant, Geometric and Functional Analysis 16(6):1274–1290, 2006.
  • C. Borell, Convex set functions in d-space, Periodica Mathematica Hungarica 6(2):111–136, 1975.
21 thms2 active usersReviewed
Numerical AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

The Rate of Convergence of Nesterov's Accelerated Forward-Backward Method is Actually Faster than 1/k^2 I: For α > 3, (Ψ + Φ)(x_k) − min(Ψ + Φ) = o(k⁻²) and ‖x_{k+1} − x_k‖ = o(k⁻¹)Research Paper

Motivation

Many problems in signal processing, statistics and machine learning take the form

min⁡x∈H Ψ(x)+Φ(x),\min_{x\in\mathcal H}\ \Psi(x)+\Phi(x),x∈Hmin​ Ψ(x)+Φ(x),

where Φ\PhiΦ is smooth and convex (a data-fit term) and Ψ\PsiΨ is convex but possibly nonsmooth or infinite-valued (an ℓ1\ell^1ℓ1 penalty, the indicator function of a constraint set). The forward-backward method alternates a gradient step on Φ\PhiΦ with a proximal step on Ψ\PsiΨ and reduces the objective gap at rate O(k−1)O(k^{-1})O(k−1) after kkk iterations. Combining it with Nesterov's extrapolation scheme gives the accelerated forward-backward method, best known as FISTA, which improves the guaranteed rate to O(k−2)O(k^{-2})O(k−2). FISTA and its variants are standard solvers for sparse recovery and image reconstruction.

Timeline:

  • 1983. Nesterov introduces the extrapolation scheme for smooth convex minimization, with an O(k−2)O(k^{-2})O(k−2) rate for function values (Nesterov 1983).
  • 2009. Beck and Teboulle extend it to the composite problem above (FISTA), with the O(k−2)O(k^{-2})O(k−2) rate (doi:10.1137/080716542).
  • 2014. Su, Boyd and Candès read the scheme as a discretization of the ODE x¨+αtx˙+∇Θ(x)=0\ddot x+\frac{\alpha}{t}\dot x+\nabla\Theta(x)=0x¨+tα​x˙+∇Θ(x)=0 (arXiv:1503.01243).
  • 2014–2015. Chambolle and Dossal (doi:10.1007/s10957-015-0746-4) and, independently, Attouch, Chbani, Peypouquet and Redont (arXiv:1507.04782) prove weak convergence of the iterates for the variant with parameter α>3\alpha>3α>3. Before that, convergence of the iterates had been open for about two decades.
  • 2015. May shows that for α>3\alpha>3α>3 the continuous-time gap is o(t−2)o(t^{-2})o(t−2) (arXiv:1509.05598).
  • 2016. Attouch and Peypouquet prove the discrete analogue: for α>3\alpha>3α>3 the function gap of the algorithm is o(k−2)o(k^{-2})o(k−2) and the velocity is o(k−1)o(k^{-1})o(k−1) (arXiv:1510.08740, SIAM J. Optim. 26(3):1824–1834).

Setting

Let H\mathcal HH be a real Hilbert space with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. Let:

  1. Ψ:H→R∪{+∞}\Psi:\mathcal H\to\mathbb R\cup\{+\infty\}Ψ:H→R∪{+∞} be proper (finite somewhere), lower semicontinuous and convex;
  2. Φ:H→R\Phi:\mathcal H\to\mathbb RΦ:H→R be convex and continuously differentiable, with gradient ∇Φ\nabla\Phi∇Φ Lipschitz continuous with constant LLL;
  3. Θ=Ψ+Φ\Theta=\Psi+\PhiΘ=Ψ+Φ, and assume the set of minimizers S=argmin⁡ΘS=\operatorname{argmin}\ThetaS=argminΘ is nonempty.

For s>0s>0s>0, the proximal map prox⁡sΨ(z)\operatorname{prox}_{s\Psi}(z)proxsΨ​(z) is the unique minimizer of u↦Ψ(u)+12s∥u−z∥2u\mapsto\Psi(u)+\frac1{2s}\|u-z\|^2u↦Ψ(u)+2s1​∥u−z∥2. Given α>0\alpha>0α>0, a step size 0<s<1/L0<s<1/L0<s<1/L and starting points x0,x1x_0,x_1x0​,x1​, algorithm (2) generates

yk=xk+k−1k+α−1(xk−xk−1),xk+1=prox⁡sΨ(yk−s∇Φ(yk)),k≥1.y_k=x_k+\frac{k-1}{k+\alpha-1}(x_k-x_{k-1}),\qquad x_{k+1}=\operatorname{prox}_{s\Psi}\big(y_k-s\nabla\Phi(y_k)\big),\qquad k\ge1.yk​=xk​+k+α−1k−1​(xk​−xk−1​),xk+1​=proxsΨ​(yk​−s∇Φ(yk​)),k≥1.

The common choice is α=3\alpha=3α=3; this mission concerns α>3\alpha>3α>3.

The proofs use the operator Gs(y)=1s(y−prox⁡sΨ(y−s∇Φ(y)))G_s(y)=\frac1s\big(y-\operatorname{prox}_{s\Psi}(y-s\nabla\Phi(y))\big)Gs​(y)=s1​(y−proxsΨ​(y−s∇Φ(y))), the sequence zk=xk+k−1α−1(xk−xk−1)z_k=x_k+\frac{k-1}{\alpha-1}(x_k-x_{k-1})zk​=xk​+α−1k−1​(xk​−xk−1​), a minimizer x∗x^*x∗, and the quantity

E(k)=2sα−1(k+α−2)2(Θ(xk)−Θ(x∗))+(α−1)∥zk−x∗∥2.\mathcal E(k)=\frac{2s}{\alpha-1}(k+\alpha-2)^2\big(\Theta(x_k)-\Theta(x^*)\big)+(\alpha-1)\|z_k-x^*\|^2 .E(k)=α−12s​(k+α−2)2(Θ(xk​)−Θ(x∗))+(α−1)∥zk​−x∗∥2.

Write θk=Θ(xk)−Θ(x∗)\theta_k=\Theta(x_k)-\Theta(x^*)θk​=Θ(xk​)−Θ(x∗) and dk=12s∥xk+1−xk∥2d_k=\frac1{2s}\|x_{k+1}-x_k\|^2dk​=2s1​∥xk+1​−xk​∥2.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 (p. 2)

For α>3\alpha>3α>3 and 0<s<1/L0<s<1/L0<s<1/L,

lim⁡k→∞k2(Θ(xk)−min⁡Θ)=0andlim⁡k→∞k ∥xk+1−xk∥=0.\lim_{k\to\infty}k^2\big(\Theta(x_k)-\min\Theta\big)=0\qquad\text{and}\qquad\lim_{k\to\infty}k\,\|x_{k+1}-x_k\|=0.k→∞lim​k2(Θ(xk​)−minΘ)=0andk→∞lim​k∥xk+1​−xk​∥=0.

The statement fixes no constants, so it is unaffected by later improvements of the explicit bounds below.

Milestones (in attack order)

  1. (9), p. 2. If sL≤1sL\le1sL≤1, then for all x,yx,yx,y: Θ(y−sGs(y))≤Θ(x)+⟨Gs(y),y−x⟩−s2∥Gs(y)∥2\Theta(y-sG_s(y))\le\Theta(x)+\langle G_s(y),y-x\rangle-\frac s2\|G_s(y)\|^2Θ(y−sGs​(y))≤Θ(x)+⟨Gs​(y),y−x⟩−2s​∥Gs​(y)∥2.
  2. (13), p. 3. For α≥3\alpha\ge3α≥3 and k≥1k\ge1k≥1: E(k+1)+2sα−3α−1k θk≤E(k)\mathcal E(k+1)+2s\frac{\alpha-3}{\alpha-1}k\,\theta_k\le\mathcal E(k)E(k+1)+2sα−1α−3​kθk​≤E(k).
  3. Fact 1, p. 3. (E(k))(\mathcal E(k))(E(k)) is nonincreasing and has a finite limit.
  4. Fact 2, p. 3. θk≤(α−1)E(1)2s(k+α−2)2\theta_k\le\frac{(\alpha-1)\mathcal E(1)}{2s(k+\alpha-2)^2}θk​≤2s(k+α−2)2(α−1)E(1)​ and ∥zk−x∗∥2≤E(1)α−1\|z_k-x^*\|^2\le\frac{\mathcal E(1)}{\alpha-1}∥zk​−x∗∥2≤α−1E(1)​ for k≥1k\ge1k≥1.
  5. Fact 3, p. 3. For α>3\alpha>3α>3: ∑k≥1k θk≤(α−1)E(1)2s(α−3)\sum_{k\ge1}k\,\theta_k\le\frac{(\alpha-1)\mathcal E(1)}{2s(\alpha-3)}∑k≥1​kθk​≤2s(α−3)(α−1)E(1)​.
  6. (14), p. 4. Θ(xk+1)+dk≤Θ(xk)+(k−1)2(k+α−1)2dk−1\Theta(x_{k+1})+d_k\le\Theta(x_k)+\frac{(k-1)^2}{(k+\alpha-1)^2}d_{k-1}Θ(xk+1​)+dk​≤Θ(xk​)+(k+α−1)2(k−1)2​dk−1​ for k≥1k\ge1k≥1.
  7. Fact 4, p. 4. For α>3\alpha>3α>3: ∑k≥1k dk≤α(3α−5)E(1)4s(α−1)(α−3)\sum_{k\ge1}k\,d_k\le\frac{\alpha(3\alpha-5)\mathcal E(1)}{4s(\alpha-1)(\alpha-3)}∑k≥1​kdk​≤4s(α−1)(α−3)α(3α−5)E(1)​.
  8. Lemma 2, p. 4. For α>3\alpha>3α>3, lim⁡k[k2dk+(k+1)2θk+1]\lim_k\big[k^2d_k+(k+1)^2\theta_{k+1}\big]limk​[k2dk​+(k+1)2θk+1​] exists and is finite.

Significance

The result. The O(k−2)O(k^{-2})O(k−2) rate of FISTA is often quoted as optimal for first-order methods. Theorem 1 shows that for α>3\alpha>3α>3 the worst-case rate along every single run is strictly better, o(k−2)o(k^{-2})o(k−2), and that the steps ∥xk+1−xk∥\|x_{k+1}-x_k\|∥xk+1​−xk​∥ decay faster than 1/k1/k1/k. No better power is possible: by Attouch et al., Example 2.13 there is no p>2p>2p>2 with an O(k−p)O(k^{-p})O(k−p) rate for every Φ\PhiΦ and Ψ\PsiΨ. The intermediate estimates (Facts 2–4) give explicit, quantitative bounds that are reused in the analysis of inexact and perturbed variants (Theorem 4 of the paper) and in mission II of this series, which proves weak convergence of the iterates.

Formalizing it. The result is proved on paper. As far as we know, no machine-checked proof of the O(k−2)O(k^{-2})O(k−2) rate of FISTA in this Hilbert-space, extended-valued setting exists in Mathlib or on this platform, and neither does the o(k−2)o(k^{-2})o(k−2) refinement. A complete development would provide reusable statements about proximal-gradient steps for functions valued in R∪{+∞}\mathbb R\cup\{+\infty\}R∪{+∞}. The page also has a factor slip in Fact 4 and Lemma 2 (see Formalization scope); checking it mechanically is one of the outputs.

Difficulty

The O(k−2)O(k^{-2})O(k−2) bound follows from the monotonicity of E\mathcal EE alone. That argument cannot give o(k−2)o(k^{-2})o(k−2): it controls k2θkk^2\theta_kk2θk​ only by the constant E(1)\mathcal E(1)E(1), and summability of kθkk\theta_kkθk​ (Fact 3) gives a decay of k2θkk^2\theta_kk2θk​ only along a subsequence, not of the whole sequence. The missing ingredient is convergence of a weighted combination of function gaps and velocities, which is Lemma 2. The bookkeeping is delicate: every step carries explicit coefficients in kkk and α\alphaα, and the inequalities must hold in the extended reals because Ψ\PsiΨ may be +∞+\infty+∞ at the starting point.

Formalization scope

  • Space and functions. H\mathcal HH is a real inner product space that is complete. Ψ\PsiΨ takes values in EReal and satisfies the published predicate IsProperClosedConvex (never −∞-\infty−∞, finite somewhere, lower semicontinuous, convex epigraph). Φ:H→R\Phi:\mathcal H\to\mathbb RΦ:H→R is ConvexOn and ContDiff ℝ 1, and gradient Φ is LipschitzWith L for some L : ℝ≥0.
  • Step size. 0<s<1/L0<s<1/L0<s<1/L is written 0 < s and s * L < 1, so that L=0L=0L=0 is allowed (s < 1 / L would be unsatisfiable when L=0L=0L=0). Display (9) uses the page's s≤1/Ls\le1/Ls≤1/L, written s * L ≤ 1.
  • Proximal map. It is a map P with the published predicate IsProx s Ψ P, which determines P=prox⁡sΨP=\operatorname{prox}_{s\Psi}P=proxsΨ​ for proper closed convex Ψ\PsiΨ and s>0s>0s>0.
  • The run. It is required to follow (2) for every k≥1k\ge1k≥1, with x0,x1x_0,x_1x0​,x1​ arbitrary; the coefficient of x0x_0x0​ vanishes at k=1k=1k=1.
  • Extended reals. Θ\ThetaΘ, E\mathcal EE and the function-value statements live in EReal. No value is ever converted to R\mathbb RR with toReal, which would turn +∞+\infty+∞ into 000. "The limit exists" (Fact 1, Lemma 2) means convergence to a real number, because in EReal every monotone sequence converges. Infinite series of nonnegative terms are stated as bounds on every partial sum. min⁡Θ\min\ThetaminΘ in the goal is ⨅ y, Θ y together with the hypothesis that a minimizer exists.
  • Corrected slips. Fact 2 is stated with E(1)\mathcal E(1)E(1) for k≥1k\ge1k≥1; the page writes E(0)\mathcal E(0)E(0) for k≥0k\ge0k≥0, which needs an iterate x−1x_{-1}x−1​. Fact 4 is stated for ∑k dk\sum k\,d_k∑kdk​; the page prints ∑k∥xk+1−xk∥2\sum k\|x_{k+1}-x_k\|^2∑k∥xk+1​−xk​∥2 with the same constant, which is off by the factor 2s2s2s and false in general. Lemma 2 is stated for the bracket k2dk+(k+1)2θk+1k^2d_k+(k+1)^2\theta_{k+1}k2dk​+(k+1)2θk+1​ of its proof (16).
  • Ruled out. The goal assumes nothing about E\mathcal EE, zkz_kzk​, θk\theta_kθk​ or dkd_kdk​. A statement of the first limit for toReal values, or with an extended-real "limit exists", would be trivially weaker and is not what is asked.
  • Welcome contributions. Proofs of any milestone; general facts about proximal maps of EReal-valued convex functions and about the descent property of LLL-smooth convex functions, which are reusable well beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • H. Attouch, J. Peypouquet, The Rate of Convergence of Nesterov's Accelerated Forward-Backward Method is Actually Faster than 1/k21/k^21/k2, SIAM J. Optim. 26(3):1824–1834, 2016. arXiv:1510.08740v4, doi:10.1137/15M1046095
  • H. Attouch, Z. Chbani, J. Peypouquet, P. Redont, Fast convergence of inertial dynamics and algorithms with asymptotic vanishing viscosity, Math. Program. 168:123–175, 2018. arXiv:1507.04782
  • A. Beck, M. Teboulle, A fast iterative shrinkage-thresholding algorithm for linear inverse problems, SIAM J. Imaging Sci. 2(1):183–202, 2009. doi:10.1137/080716542
  • A. Chambolle, C. Dossal, On the convergence of the iterates of the "fast iterative shrinkage/thresholding algorithm", J. Optim. Theory Appl. 166:968–982, 2015. doi:10.1007/s10957-015-0746-4
  • R. May, Asymptotic for a second order evolution equation with convex potential and vanishing damping term, 2015. arXiv:1509.05598
  • Y. Nesterov, A method of solving a convex programming problem with convergence rate O(1/k2)O(1/k^2)O(1/k2), Soviet Math. Dokl. 27:372–376, 1983. mathnet
  • W. Su, S. Boyd, E. J. Candès, A differential equation for modeling Nesterov's accelerated gradient method: theory and insights, J. Mach. Learn. Res. 17(153):1–43, 2016. arXiv:1503.01243
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Analysis and Algorithms for Service Parts Supply Chains VIII: Bounds on Optimal Stock AllocationsTextbook

Motivation

Military and commercial service parts systems keep repairable parts at a central depot warehouse and at a set of operating bases. Chapter 10 of Muckstadt's Analysis and Algorithms for Service Parts Supply Chains (Springer 2005, DOI 10.1007/b138879) turns from the planning models of the earlier chapters to execution. Each period, the stock that is at the depot or arriving there must be divided among the bases. The planner knows what is already in the pipeline and faces random demand at each base. The chapter's models are solved in a rolling-horizon manner. Each period's decisions are the first step of an optimal plan over a short horizon. That plan has to be computable at scale, for thousands of items and dozens of bases.

What makes this possible is a structural fact. In an optimal allocation, the cumulative stock sent to a base never exceeds what a single-period newsvendor problem at that base would ask for. This bound shrinks the allocation integer programs to linear programs of manageable size. This mission formalizes that bound and the facts it rests on.

Setting

Fix one item. Time is counted in whole periods t=0,1,2,…t = 0, 1, 2, \dotst=0,1,2,…, and JJJ is the finite set of bases. For each base jjj:

  • Ti0T_{i0}Ti0​ is the repair lead time, so shipments are decided in periods t=0,…,Ti0t = 0, \dots, T_{i0}t=0,…,Ti0​;
  • TijrT^r_{ij}Tijr​ and TijeT^e_{ij}Tije​ are the regular and expedited transportation times from the depot to base jjj, integers with 1≤Tije<Tijr1 \le T^e_{ij} < T^r_{ij}1≤Tije​<Tijr​;
  • S~i0t\tilde S_{i0t}S~i0t​ is the known cumulative supply at the depot through period ttt (stock on hand plus arrivals already in the pipeline), and S~ijt\tilde S_{ijt}S~ijt​ the known cumulative supply at base jjj. The latter is constant for t≥Tijrt \ge T^r_{ij}t≥Tijr​, since nothing not yet shipped can arrive earlier than TijrT^r_{ij}Tijr​ by regular transport;
  • XijtX_{ijt}Xijt​ is the cumulative demand at base jjj through period ttt, a nonnegative integer random variable, nondecreasing in ttt, with finite mean;
  • hij>0h_{ij} > 0hij​>0, bij>0b_{ij} > 0bij​>0 and eij≥0e_{ij} \ge 0eij​≥0 are the incremental holding, shortage and expediting costs.

If SijtS_{ijt}Sijt​ units have arrived at base jjj by period ttt, the expected cost of that period is

Gijt(S)=hij E[S−Xijt]++bij E[Xijt−S]+,G_{ijt}(S) = h_{ij}\,E[S - X_{ijt}]^+ + b_{ij}\,E[X_{ijt} - S]^+,Gijt​(S)=hij​E[S−Xijt​]++bij​E[Xijt​−S]+,

and stock left at the end of the horizon costs

Qij(S)=hij∑t>Tijr+Ti0E[S−Xijt]+.Q_{ij}(S) = h_{ij}\sum_{t > T^r_{ij} + T_{i0}} E[S - X_{ijt}]^+ .Qij​(S)=hij​t>Tijr​+Ti0​∑​E[S−Xijt​]+.

The stock allocation model SAMi\mathrm{SAM}_iSAMi​ chooses nonnegative integer regular shipments yijtry^r_{ijt}yijtr​, t=0,…,Ti0t = 0, \dots, T_{i0}t=0,…,Ti0​, with cumulative shipments never exceeding cumulative depot supply. The cumulative stock at base jjj is Sijt=S~ij(Tijr−1)+∑t′≤t−Tijryijt′rS_{ijt} = \tilde S_{ij(T^r_{ij}-1)} + \sum_{t' \le t - T^r_{ij}} y^r_{ijt'}Sijt​=S~ij(Tijr​−1)​+∑t′≤t−Tijr​​yijt′r​, and the model minimizes ∑j{∑t=TijrTijr+Ti0Gijt(Sijt)+Qij(Sij(Tijr+Ti0))}\sum_j \{\sum_{t=T^r_{ij}}^{T^r_{ij}+T_{i0}} G_{ijt}(S_{ijt}) + Q_{ij}(S_{ij(T^r_{ij}+T_{i0})})\}∑j​{∑t=Tijr​Tijr​+Ti0​​Gijt​(Sijt​)+Qij​(Sij(Tijr​+Ti0​)​)}. The extended model ESAMi\mathrm{ESAM}_iESAMi​ adds expedited shipments yijtey^e_{ijt}yijte​, which arrive after TijeT^e_{ij}Tije​ periods at an extra cost eije_{ij}eij​ per unit.

The constrained newsvendor problem CNijt\mathrm{CN}_{ijt}CNijt​ minimizes Gijt(S)G_{ijt}(S)Gijt​(S) over integers S≥S~ijtS \ge \tilde S_{ijt}S≥S~ijt​. Its largest optimal solution is written S^ijt\hat S_{ijt}S^ijt​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 15 (p. 237)

In every optimal solution of SAMi\mathrm{SAM}_iSAMi​, for every base jjj and every t∈[Tijr,Tijr+Ti0]t \in [T^r_{ij}, T^r_{ij} + T_{i0}]t∈[Tijr​,Tijr​+Ti0​],

S~ij(Tijr−1)  ≤  Sijt∗  ≤  S^ijt.\tilde S_{ij(T^r_{ij}-1)} \;\le\; S^*_{ijt} \;\le\; \hat S_{ijt}.S~ij(Tijr​−1)​≤Sijt∗​≤S^ijt​.

The bound is uniform over optimal solutions and uses nothing but the single-period problems.

Milestones

  1. Separability (Section 10.4.1, p. 236). The multi-item problem SAM\mathrm{SAM}SAM splits into the SAMi\mathrm{SAM}_iSAMi​: its optimal solutions are exactly the tuples of optimal item solutions, and Z∗=∑iZi∗Z^* = \sum_i Z^*_iZ∗=∑i​Zi∗​.
  2. Convexity of QijQ_{ij}Qij​ (p. 234) and of GijtG_{ijt}Gijt​ (p. 237), in the discrete sense of nondecreasing first differences on Z\mathbb ZZ.
  3. The newsvendor solution (10.19). S^ijt=max⁡(S~ijt,s0)\hat S_{ijt} = \max(\tilde S_{ijt}, s^0)S^ijt​=max(S~ijt​,s0) with s0s^0s0 the least integer such that P(Xijt≤s0)>bij/(bij+hij)P(X_{ijt} \le s^0) > b_{ij}/(b_{ij}+h_{ij})P(Xijt​≤s0)>bij​/(bij​+hij​).
  4. Monotonicity (10.20). S^ij(t−1)≤S^ijt\hat S_{ij(t-1)} \le \hat S_{ijt}S^ij(t−1)​≤S^ijt​ on [Tijr,Tijr+Ti0][T^r_{ij}, T^r_{ij} + T_{i0}][Tijr​,Tijr​+Ti0​].
  5. Theorem 16, corrected (p. 244). In every optimal solution of ESAMi\mathrm{ESAM}_iESAMi​, S~ijt≤Sijt∗\tilde S_{ijt} \le S^*_{ijt}S~ijt​≤Sijt∗​. Writing Mjt=max⁡k∈[Tije,t](S^ijk−S~ijk)M_{jt} = \max_{k \in [T^e_{ij}, t]}(\hat S_{ijk} - \tilde S_{ijk})Mjt​=maxk∈[Tije​,t]​(S^ijk​−S~ijk​), also Sijt∗≤S~ijt+MjtS^*_{ijt} \le \tilde S_{ijt} + M_{jt}Sijt∗​≤S~ijt​+Mjt​, provided Tijr=Tije+1T^r_{ij} = T^e_{ij} + 1Tijr​=Tije​+1 or t<Tije+Ti0t < T^e_{ij} + T_{i0}t<Tije​+Ti0​.

Two supporting items state that SAMi\mathrm{SAM}_iSAMi​ and ESAMi\mathrm{ESAM}_iESAMi​ have optimal solutions. A third, theorem16_counterexample, exhibits an instance in which Theorem 16's upper bound, as printed, fails.

Significance

Theorem 15 is what allows the book (pp. 238–239) to rewrite SAMi\mathrm{SAM}_iSAMi​ with 0–1 variables δijtk\delta_{ijtk}δijtk​ indicating Sijt=kS_{ijt} = kSijt​=k. Only kkk between S~ij(Tijr−1)\tilde S_{ij(T^r_{ij}-1)}S~ij(Tijr​−1)​ and S^ijt\hat S_{ijt}S^ijt​ is needed, so the number of variables is governed by the newsvendor quantities rather than by the total depot supply. Theorem 16 plays the same role for the model with expediting. Both bounds also justify the greedy heuristics of Sections 10.4.3 and 10.5.3. Those heuristics never raise a base's stock above its newsvendor level.

The book proves both theorems in half a page each by an exchange argument. This mission produces machine-checked versions and, in doing so, settles the exact scope of Theorem 16. As printed it is false. With Tijr≥Tije+2T^r_{ij} \ge T^e_{ij} + 2Tijr​≥Tije​+2, an expedited shipment in the last decision period can be the only way to cover a later period's demand, and the optimal plan then overstocks an earlier period. The mission states the corrected theorem and the counterexample; the counterexample was checked in Lean during drafting. None of the chapter's results has been formalized before, as far as the platform's catalogue shows.

Difficulty

The central step is the exchange. Take the first period kkk in which an optimal plan overshoots its bound, and delay by one period one unit that arrives at kkk. This must be shown feasible, to change only SijkS_{ijk}Sijk​, and to lower the objective strictly. That in turn needs strict decrease of a convex function to the right of its largest minimizer, and an argument for the last period, where there is no later period to delay into. The indexing is heavy: two lead times, truncated sums min⁡(t−Tije,Ti0)\min(t - T^e_{ij}, T_{i0})min(t−Tije​,Ti0​), and cumulative constraints across bases.

The first idea, that a plan above the newsvendor level can always be improved by shipping less, fails. Shipping less changes the stock in every later period too, and later periods may need the unit. The bound follows only from a delay that affects exactly one period. For ESAMi\mathrm{ESAM}_iESAMi​ even such a delay is sometimes unavailable, which is where the book's Theorem 16 breaks.

Formalization scope

  • One item at a time: ItemModel J Ω P bundles the data of one item with the cumulative demands on a probability space (Ω,P)(\Omega, P)(Ω,P), [IsProbabilityMeasure P]. Bases form a Fintype. Periods are ℕ. Stock levels and supplies are ℤ, since net inventory may be negative. Shipments are functions J → ℕ → ℕ, so nonnegativity and integrality are built in. Costs are in ℝ.
  • GGG and QQQ are defined from the demand as in the book: Bochner integrals of (S−X)+(S - X)^+(S−X)+ and (X−S)+(X - S)^+(X−S)+, and a tsum for QQQ. The item model requires finite means and convergence of the series for QQQ at every stock level, so that no integral or sum takes Lean's junk value 000.
  • "The largest optimal solution" is the predicate IsLargestCNSolution (feasible, minimizing, and above every feasible minimizer). Theorems take S^\hat SS^ as a function satisfying it. Milestone (10.19) shows it exists.
  • "An optimal solution" means a feasible plan with objective at most that of every feasible plan. The theorems hold for every optimal plan.
  • Pinned conventions and additions. The following are not written in the book: hij,bij>0h_{ij}, b_{ij} > 0hij​,bij​>0 and eij≥0e_{ij} \ge 0eij​≥0; nonnegative, nondecreasing depot supply; nondecreasing base supply (used in the book's proof of Theorem 16); finite mean demand; convergence of QQQ's series. (10.19) is read with the critical fractile "least sss with F(s)>b/(b+h)F(s) > b/(b+h)F(s)>b/(b+h)", the book's ⌈F−1⌉\lceil F^{-1}\rceil⌈F−1⌉/⌊F−1⌋\lfloor F^{-1}\rfloor⌊F−1⌋ with ties broken upward. Theorem 16 carries the proviso "Tijr=Tije+1T^r_{ij} = T^e_{ij} + 1Tijr​=Tije​+1 or t<Tije+Ti0t < T^e_{ij} + T_{i0}t<Tije​+Ti0​". Separability is stated both for optimal plans and for optimal values.
  • Ruled out. The feasible sets of SAMi\mathrm{SAM}_iSAMi​ and ESAMi\mathrm{ESAM}_iESAMi​ impose no upper bound on the cumulative stock, and S^\hat SS^ is defined from GGG alone, never from the allocation problem. The bounds are therefore not true by definition.
  • Omitted. The LP reformulations (10.22)–(10.28) and (10.45)–(10.52) and the integrality of their relaxations, which the book asserts with a reference to [68]; the greedy algorithms and their optimality conditions (asserted); the book's claim that QijQ_{ij}Qij​ is strictly increasing (p. 238), which fails when P(Xijt≤S)=0P(X_{ijt} \le S) = 0P(Xijt​≤S)=0 beyond the horizon and is not needed; the dynamic program of Section 10.3 and the repair model of Section 10.6.
  • The discrete-convexity and newsvendor facts are reusable for any single-location inventory model on Z\mathbb ZZ. Contributions are welcome on the convexity lemmas, the critical-fractile characterization, and a reusable exchange lemma for cumulative-shipment models.

Selected references

  • J. A. Muckstadt, Analysis and Algorithms for Service Parts Supply Chains, Springer Series in Operations Research and Financial Engineering, Springer, 2005, Chapter 10, pp. 225–246. DOI 10.1007/b138879
  • K. J. Arrow, T. Harris, J. Marschak, "Optimal inventory policy", Econometrica 19(3), 1951, 250–272 (the newsvendor critical fractile). DOI 10.2307/1906813
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Value of Information in Bayesian Routing Games II: Equilibrium Adoption Rates of Information Systems Are the Minimizers of the Equilibrium PotentialResearch Paper

Motivation

Traffic information systems (TIS) such as navigation apps send drivers private, noisy signals about the state of the road network: incidents, weather, closures. When several such systems coexist, their subscribers act on different information, and the congestion each population experiences depends on how all of them route. A question then arises for transport planners and for the information providers themselves: if travelers are free to choose which system to subscribe to, which market shares of the competing systems are stable?

Wu, Amin and Ozdaglar (Operations Research 69(1):148–163, 2021; preprint arXiv:1808.10590) model this situation as a Bayesian routing game with heterogeneous information and answer the question exactly: the equilibrium adoption rates are the minimizers of a convex function of the population sizes, the equilibrium value of a weighted potential. This mission formalizes that characterization (Theorem 4 of the paper) together with the results its proof rests on. A companion mission (Value of Information in Bayesian Routing Games I) formalizes the paper's other main result, the sign and monotonicity of the relative value of information between two populations.

Setting

A Bayesian routing game Γ(λ)\Gamma(\lambda)Γ(λ) has a single origin–destination pair, a finite set of edges E\mathcal EE and a finite nonempty set of routes R\mathcal RR (each route a set of edges), and a finite set of network states S\mathcal SS. Travelers of total demand D>0D>0D>0 are split into populations i∈Ii\in\mathcal Ii∈I, one per TIS; population iii has size λiD\lambda^iDλiD, where the size vector λ\lambdaλ lies in the simplex Δ={λ:λi≥0, ∑iλi=1}\Delta=\{\lambda:\lambda^i\ge0,\ \sum_i\lambda^i=1\}Δ={λ:λi≥0, ∑i​λi=1}. Each population receives a signal (its type) tit^iti from a finite set Ti\mathcal T^iTi; states and type profiles t=(ti)it=(t^i)_it=(ti)i​ are drawn from a common prior π∈Δ(S×T)\pi\in\Delta(\mathcal S\times\mathcal T)π∈Δ(S×T). Edge eee in state sss has cost ces(w)c^s_e(w)ces​(w) at load www, positive, strictly increasing and differentiable.

A strategy profile qqq assigns to each population and type a split qri(ti)≥0q^i_r(t^i)\ge0qri​(ti)≥0 of its demand over routes, with ∑rqri(ti)=λiD\sum_rq^i_r(t^i)=\lambda^iD∑r​qri​(ti)=λiD; these form the polytope Q(λ)\mathcal Q(\lambda)Q(λ). It induces route flows fr(t)=∑iqri(ti)f_r(t)=\sum_iq^i_r(t^i)fr​(t)=∑i​qri​(ti) and edge loads we(t)=∑r∋efr(t)w_e(t)=\sum_{r\ni e}f_r(t)we​(t)=∑r∋e​fr​(t). A traveler of population iii with signal tit^iti forms the belief βi(s,t−i∣ti)=π(s,ti,t−i)/Pr⁡(ti)\beta^i(s,t^{-i}\mid t^i)=\pi(s,t^i,t^{-i})/\Pr(t^i)βi(s,t−i∣ti)=π(s,ti,t−i)/Pr(ti) and evaluates the expected route cost E[cr(q)∣ti]=∑s,t−i∑e∈rβi(s,t−i∣ti) ces(we(t))\mathbb E[c_r(q)\mid t^i]=\sum_{s,t^{-i}}\sum_{e\in r}\beta^i(s,t^{-i}\mid t^i)\,c^s_e(w_e(t))E[cr​(q)∣ti]=∑s,t−i​∑e∈r​βi(s,t−i∣ti)ces​(we​(t)). A Bayesian Wardrop equilibrium (BWE) is a q∈Q(λ)q\in\mathcal Q(\lambda)q∈Q(λ) in which every type uses only routes of minimal expected cost. The equilibrium population cost is

Ci∗(λ)=∑ti∈TiPr⁡(ti)min⁡r∈RE[cr(q∗)∣ti].C^{i*}(\lambda)=\sum_{t^i\in\mathcal T^i}\Pr(t^i)\min_{r\in\mathcal R}\mathbb E[c_r(q^*)\mid t^i].Ci∗(λ)=ti∈Ti∑​Pr(ti)r∈Rmin​E[cr​(q∗)∣ti].

The weighted potential is Φ(q)=∑s,e,tπ(s,t)∫0we(t)ces(z) dz\Phi(q)=\sum_{s,e,t}\pi(s,t)\int_0^{w_e(t)}c^s_e(z)\,dzΦ(q)=∑s,e,t​π(s,t)∫0we​(t)​ces​(z)dz, and Ψ(λ)=min⁡q∈Q(λ)Φ(q)\Psi(\lambda)=\min_{q\in\mathcal Q(\lambda)}\Phi(q)Ψ(λ)=minq∈Q(λ)​Φ(q) is its equilibrium value. In route-flow form, Φ^(f)\widehat\Phi(f)Φ(f) is the same expression in terms of fff; route flows satisfy linear constraints (14a)–(14c) (a separability condition across populations, total demand DDD, nonnegativity) and one information impact constraint per population, J^i(f)≤λiD\widehat J^i(f)\le\lambda^iDJi(f)≤λiD, where J^i(f)=D−∑rmin⁡tifr(ti,t^−i)\widehat J^i(f)=D-\sum_r\min_{t^i}f_r(t^i,\widehat t^{-i})Ji(f)=D−∑r​minti​fr​(ti,t−i) measures how much of the demand reacts to population iii's signal. Let F†\mathcal F^\daggerF† be the set of minimizers of Φ^\widehat\PhiΦ subject to (14a)–(14c) only, and

Λ†={λ∈Δ: ∃f†∈F†, J^i(f†)≤λiD  ∀i}.\Lambda^\dagger=\{\lambda\in\Delta:\ \exists f^\dagger\in\mathcal F^\dagger,\ \widehat J^i(f^\dagger)\le\lambda^iD\ \ \forall i\}.Λ†={λ∈Δ: ∃f†∈F†, Ji(f†)≤λiD  ∀i}.

In the two-stage game, travelers first choose a TIS, inducing λ\lambdaλ, and then play Γ(λ)\Gamma(\lambda)Γ(λ). A size vector is a vector of equilibrium adoption rates if no traveler gains by switching TIS:

λi>0 ⟹ Ci∗(λ)=min⁡j∈ICj∗(λ)∀i∈I.(31)\lambda^i>0\ \Longrightarrow\ C^{i*}(\lambda)=\min_{j\in\mathcal I}C^{j*}(\lambda)\qquad\forall i\in\mathcal I.\tag{31}λi>0 ⟹ Ci∗(λ)=j∈Imin​Cj∗(λ)∀i∈I.(31)

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4

For every λ∈Δ\lambda\in\Deltaλ∈Δ and every BWE of Γ(λ)\Gamma(\lambda)Γ(λ),

(31) holds  ⟺  λ∈Λ†.(31)\ \text{holds}\iff\lambda\in\Lambda^\dagger .(31) holds⟺λ∈Λ†.

With the existence of a BWE for every λ∈Δ\lambda\in\Deltaλ∈Δ, this is the paper's statement that the set of equilibrium adoption rates is Λ†\Lambda^\daggerΛ†.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 1. qqq is a BWE of Γ(λ)\Gamma(\lambda)Γ(λ) iff qqq minimizes Φ\PhiΦ over Q(λ)\mathcal Q(\lambda)Q(λ); the equilibrium edge load w∗(λ)w^*(\lambda)w∗(λ) is unique.
  2. Proposition 2. A route flow in the flow polytope F(λ)\mathcal F(\lambda)F(λ) ((14a)–(14c) plus all information impact constraints) is an equilibrium flow iff it minimizes Φ^\widehat\PhiΦ over F(λ)\mathcal F(\lambda)F(λ).
  3. Lemma 5. Ψ\PsiΨ is convex on Δ\DeltaΔ, and with zij=ei−ejz^{ij}=e_i-e_jzij=ei​−ej​ and Vij∗=Cj∗−Ci∗V^{ij*}=C^{j*}-C^{i*}Vij∗=Cj∗−Ci∗,
lim⁡ϵ→0+Ψ(λ+ϵzij)−Ψ(λ)ϵ=−D Vij∗(λ).\lim_{\epsilon\to0^+}\frac{\Psi(\lambda+\epsilon z^{ij})-\Psi(\lambda)}{\epsilon}=-D\,V^{ij*}(\lambda).ϵ→0+lim​ϵΨ(λ+ϵzij)−Ψ(λ)​=−DVij∗(λ).
  1. Proposition 5. Λ†\Lambda^\daggerΛ† is convex, Λ†=argmin⁡λ∈ΔΨ(λ)\Lambda^\dagger=\operatorname{argmin}_{\lambda\in\Delta}\Psi(\lambda)Λ†=argminλ∈Δ​Ψ(λ), and the equilibrium edge load equals the size-independent load w†w^\daggerw† of F†\mathcal F^\daggerF† iff λ∈Λ†\lambda\in\Lambda^\daggerλ∈Λ†.

A separate item states the existence of a BWE for every λ∈Δ\lambda\in\Deltaλ∈Δ.

Significance

The result. Theorem 4 reduces a question about a two-stage game with a continuum of travelers and private signals to the minimization of one convex function over a simplex. It shows that the stable market shares form a convex set, generally not a single point, so each system's equilibrium adoption rate ranges over an interval; and that this set is determined by the joint information environment of all systems, not by each system's signal alone. On ˆ\Lambda^\daggerˆ the equilibrium edge load does not depend on the shares at all, which identifies when changes in market shares leave congestion unchanged.

Formalizing it. The proofs of Theorem 1, Proposition 2 and Proposition 5 are in the paper's online e-companion, and Lemma 5 relies on sensitivity results for parametric convex programs cited from the literature. No part of this development has, to our knowledge, been machine-checked. A complete formalization would produce a verified potential-game characterization of Bayesian Wardrop equilibria with heterogeneous information and a verified directional-derivative formula for the optimal value of a parametric convex program; nothing comparable is currently on the platform (the existing Wardrop development covers complete information only).

Difficulty

The direction "λ∈Λ†\lambda\in\Lambda^\daggerλ∈Λ† implies (31)" is not a pointwise statement about costs: it follows from Λ†\Lambda^\daggerΛ† being the argmin of Ψ\PsiΨ together with the formula linking directional derivatives of Ψ\PsiΨ to cost differences. Both are hard. The derivative formula (26) is a statement about the optimal value of a convex program whose feasible set moves with λ\lambdaλ; its standard proofs pass through uniqueness of Lagrange multipliers, which fails exactly at the degenerate size vectors (λi=0\lambda^i=0λi=0) that Theorem 4 must cover, since an unused TIS is a legitimate outcome. The identity Λ†=argmin⁡Ψ\Lambda^\dagger=\operatorname{argmin}\PsiΛ†=argminΨ needs the route-flow reformulation (Proposition 2), in which the size vector enters only through the information impact constraints, and the uniqueness of the minimizing edge load. The natural first idea, comparing population costs directly at a given equilibrium, gives no handle on which size vectors make them equal.

Formalization scope

The Lean development lives in the namespace BayesRouting.Adoption. Populations, types, states, edges and routes are finite types; type spaces and the route set are nonempty; routes are edge sets. The game is a structure whose fields include the paper's standing assumptions: the prior is a probability distribution, D>0D>0D>0, and each cost is positive on nonnegative loads, strictly increasing and differentiable (on all of R\mathbb RR, which loses no generality). One assumption is added: every type profile has positive probability. Without it the equilibrium edge load need not be unique and the beliefs can be undefined; it excludes the paper's Example 2(i) (perfectly correlated signals).

Conventions: size vectors range over the probability simplex; Ψ\PsiΨ is the infimum of Φ\PhiΦ over Q(λ)\mathcal Q(\lambda)Q(λ) and is only compared at points of the simplex (outside it the feasible set can be empty and the value is a default); Ci∗C^{i*}Ci∗ is the last form of the paper's (7), well defined when λi=0\lambda^i=0λi=0; J^i\widehat J^iJi is the maximum over reference profiles, which equals the paper's value on flows satisfying (14a); equilibrium statements are made for every BWE rather than for "the" equilibrium; F†\mathcal F^\daggerF† and similar sets are argmin sets. Lemma 5 is stated for the directions zijz^{ij}zij with λj>0\lambda^j>0λj>0 (otherwise λ+ϵzij\lambda+\epsilon z^{ij}λ+ϵzij leaves the simplex); λi=0\lambda^i=0λi=0 is allowed.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the existence of a BWE is its own item, so "for every BWE" is not vacuous, and Λ†\Lambda^\daggerΛ† is defined by (30) from the flow problem (28), not as the argmin of Ψ\PsiΨ, so the goal is not a restatement of Proposition 5.

Infrastructure a complete development needs: KKT conditions for convex programs with linear constraints, convexity of integrals of increasing functions, compactness arguments for existence of minimizers, and one-sided directional derivatives of optimal-value functions. The last two are reusable well beyond this mission. Proofs of any item, and of auxiliary lemmas such as Proposition 1 of the paper (feasible route flows form the polytope F(λ)\mathcal F(\lambda)F(λ)), are welcome.

Selected references

  • M. Wu, S. Amin, A. E. Ozdaglar, Value of Information in Bayesian Routing Games, Operations Research 69(1):148–163, 2021. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.2020.1999 (preprint: https://arxiv.org/abs/1808.10590)
  • W. H. Sandholm, Potential games with continuous player sets, Journal of Economic Theory 97(1):81–108, 2001. https://doi.org/10.1006/jeth.2000.2696
  • A. V. Fiacco, J. Kyparisis, Convexity and concavity properties of the optimal value function in parametric nonlinear programming, Journal of Optimization Theory and Applications 48(1):95–126, 1986. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00938592
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Value of Information in Bayesian Routing Games I: Sign and Monotonicity of the Relative Value of Information Across Size RegimesResearch Paper

Motivation

Traffic information systems (TIS) such as navigation apps send drivers noisy signals about the state of a road network: incidents, weather, closures. When several such systems coexist, each with its own subscriber base and its own information, a natural question for operators and regulators is whether subscribing to one system rather than another actually lowers a driver's expected travel cost in equilibrium, and how this advantage depends on how many drivers use each system. More information for one population also changes the congestion everybody else faces, so the answer is not simply "more information is better".

Wu, Amin and Ozdaglar (Operations Research 69(1), 2021) answer this question for nonatomic routing games with heterogeneous, possibly correlated information. Their model builds on the weighted potential game framework of Sandholm (2001) and on sensitivity analysis of convex programs. This mission formalizes their Section 5 result: for any two populations the sign of the relative value of information is determined by which of three explicitly computable size regimes the population sizes lie in, and the relative value decreases as one population grows at the expense of the other.

Setting

A Bayesian routing game has a finite set of populations I\mathcal II, one per TIS, a finite set of network states S\mathcal SS, and for each population iii a finite nonempty type space Ti\mathcal T^iTi of signals. A common prior π\piπ is a probability distribution on S×T\mathcal S\times\mathcal TS×T, T=∏iTi\mathcal T=\prod_i\mathcal T^iT=∏i​Ti. A network with a single origin–destination pair has edges E\mathcal EE and a finite nonempty set of routes R\mathcal RR; each edge has a state-dependent cost cesc^s_eces​ that is positive, strictly increasing and differentiable. The total demand is D>0D>0D>0, and population iii carries the fraction λi\lambda^iλi of it, with λi≥0\lambda^i\ge0λi≥0 and ∑iλi=1\sum_i\lambda^i=1∑i​λi=1.

A strategy profile qqq assigns to each population iii and type tit^iti a split qri(ti)≥0q^i_r(t^i)\ge0qri​(ti)≥0 of its demand λiD\lambda^iDλiD over routes. It induces the route flow fr(t)=∑iqri(ti)f_r(t)=\sum_iq^i_r(t^i)fr​(t)=∑i​qri​(ti) and the edge load we(t)=∑r∋efr(t)w_e(t)=\sum_{r\ni e}f_r(t)we​(t)=∑r∋e​fr​(t). With the belief βi(s,t−i∣ti)=π(s,ti,t−i)/Pr⁡(ti)\beta^i(s,t^{-i}\mid t^i)=\pi(s,t^i,t^{-i})/\Pr(t^i)βi(s,t−i∣ti)=π(s,ti,t−i)/Pr(ti), type tit^iti evaluates route rrr by its expected cost E[cr(q)∣ti]\mathbb E[c_r(q)\mid t^i]E[cr​(q)∣ti]. A Bayesian Wardrop equilibrium (BWE) is a feasible qqq in which every type uses only routes of minimal expected cost. The equilibrium population cost is Ci∗(λ)=∑tiPr⁡(ti)min⁡rE[cr(q)∣ti]C^{i*}(\lambda)=\sum_{t^i}\Pr(t^i)\min_r\mathbb E[c_r(q)\mid t^i]Ci∗(λ)=∑ti​Pr(ti)minr​E[cr​(q)∣ti] at a BWE qqq.

The game has a weighted potential Φ(q)=∑s,e,tπ(s,t)∫0we(t)ces(z) dz\Phi(q)=\sum_{s,e,t}\pi(s,t)\int_0^{w_e(t)}c^s_e(z)\,dzΦ(q)=∑s,e,t​π(s,t)∫0we​(t)​ces​(z)dz; its minimum over feasible profiles is the equilibrium potential value Ψ(λ)\Psi(\lambda)Ψ(λ). For two populations i≠ji\ne ji=j, the direction zijz^{ij}zij moves demand share from jjj to iii, and ∣λ−ij∣|\lambda^{-ij}|∣λ−ij∣ is the total share of the other populations. The impact of information J^i(f)\widehat J^i(f)Ji(f) measures how much of population iii's demand is moved by its signal. Two thresholds λ‾i≤λ‾i\underline\lambda^i\le\overline\lambda^iλ​i≤λi are computed from the optimal set Fij,†\mathcal F^{ij,\dagger}Fij,† of an auxiliary convex program over route flows in which the separate information constraints of iii and jjj are merged. They define three regimes: Λ1ij\Lambda^{ij}_1Λ1ij​ (λi<λ‾i\lambda^i<\underline\lambda^iλi<λ​i), Λ2ij\Lambda^{ij}_2Λ2ij​ (λ‾i≤λi≤λ‾i\underline\lambda^i\le\lambda^i\le\overline\lambda^iλ​i≤λi≤λi) and Λ3ij\Lambda^{ij}_3Λ3ij​ (λi>λ‾i\lambda^i>\overline\lambda^iλi>λi). The relative value of information is Vij∗(λ)=Cj∗(λ)−Ci∗(λ)V^{ij*}(\lambda)=C^{j*}(\lambda)-C^{i*}(\lambda)Vij∗(λ)=Cj∗(λ)−Ci∗(λ).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3

For i≠ji\ne ji=j and admissible λ\lambdaλ (in the simplex with λi,λj>0\lambda^i,\lambda^j>0λi,λj>0), and every BWE of Γ(λ)\Gamma(\lambda)Γ(λ),

Vij∗(λ)>0 on Λ1ij,Vij∗(λ)=0 on Λ2ij,Vij∗(λ)<0 on Λ3ij,V^{ij*}(\lambda)>0 \text{ on } \Lambda^{ij}_1,\qquad V^{ij*}(\lambda)=0 \text{ on } \Lambda^{ij}_2,\qquad V^{ij*}(\lambda)<0 \text{ on } \Lambda^{ij}_3,Vij∗(λ)>0 on Λ1ij​,Vij∗(λ)=0 on Λ2ij​,Vij∗(λ)<0 on Λ3ij​,

and Vij∗V^{ij*}Vij∗ is nonincreasing along zijz^{ij}zij: Vij∗(λ+εzij)≤Vij∗(λ)V^{ij*}(\lambda+\varepsilon z^{ij})\le V^{ij*}(\lambda)Vij∗(λ+εzij)≤Vij∗(λ) for ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 with both endpoints admissible.

Milestones

The route to the goal follows the paper: Lemma 1 (weighted potential), Lemma 2 (strict convexity of the edge-load potential), Theorem 1 (equilibria are the minimizers of Φ\PhiΦ; unique edge load), Lemma 3 (unique Lagrange multipliers), Proposition 1 (the feasible route flows form a polytope F(λ)\mathcal F(\lambda)F(λ)), Proposition 2 (equilibrium route flows minimize Φ^\widehat\PhiΦ over F(λ)\mathcal F(\lambda)F(λ)), Lemma 4 (0≤λ‾i≤λ‾i≤1−∣λ−ij∣0\le\underline\lambda^i\le\overline\lambda^i\le1-|\lambda^{-ij}|0≤λ​i≤λi≤1−∣λ−ij∣), Theorem 2 (equilibrium flows in each regime), Proposition 3 (Ψ\PsiΨ decreases, stays constant, increases along zijz^{ij}zij in the three regimes) and Lemma 5 (Ψ\PsiΨ is convex and directionally differentiable, and Vij∗(λ)=−1D∇zijΨ(λ)V^{ij*}(\lambda)=-\frac1D\nabla_{z^{ij}}\Psi(\lambda)Vij∗(λ)=−D1​∇zij​Ψ(λ)).

Significance

Theorem 3 says that a population has an advantage over another exactly when it is the minor population of the pair, relative to thresholds that depend only on the other populations' sizes. Both populations face the same equilibrium cost in the middle regime. It gives a procedure for comparing two information systems without computing equilibria for each size vector: solve one convex program, read off two thresholds, and locate λi\lambda^iλi. The paper's Section 6 uses the same machinery, through Lemma 5, to characterize the equilibrium adoption rates of information systems.

The paper proves these results with the main proofs in the article and the sensitivity-analysis lemmas (Lemmas EC.1–EC.4) in its e-companion. None of them has a machine-checked proof. The formalization requires a Lean account of Bayesian Wardrop equilibria, of the equivalence between equilibria and a convex program, and of directional derivatives of the optimal value of a parametric convex program. Parts of this are reusable for any nonatomic routing or congestion game.

Difficulty

The equilibrium strategy profile is not unique and changes discontinuously with λ\lambdaλ. Differentiating equilibrium costs in λ\lambdaλ directly therefore fails. The paper instead works with the optimal value Ψ(λ)\Psi(\lambda)Ψ(λ), whose one-sided directional derivative is expressed through Lagrange multipliers. That requires a sensitivity theorem for convex programs whose constraints depend affinely on the parameter, together with uniqueness of multipliers, which fails for populations of size zero. The regime analysis also needs a characterization of the route flows that are induced by feasible strategy profiles. That set is described by the nonlinear-looking constraint J^i(f)≤λiD\widehat J^i(f)\le\lambda^iDJi(f)≤λiD, a minimum over types inside a sum over routes. Strict monotonicity of Ψ\PsiΨ in the side regimes needs the tightness of an information constraint at every equilibrium, not only at one.

Formalization scope

The model is a Lean structure BayesRouting.VOI.Game over finite types of populations, type spaces, states, edges and routes. Routes are given by their edge sets, and the directed-graph structure is not used. Type spaces and the route set are nonempty. The prior is a probability distribution, D>0D>0D>0, and costs are positive on nonnegative loads, strictly increasing and differentiable on R\mathbb RR. One assumption is added: every type profile has positive probability. It makes beliefs well defined and the equilibrium edge load unique, and it excludes perfectly correlated signals.

Conventions: Ci∗C^{i*}Ci∗ is the last form of eq. (7), which does not divide by λiD\lambda^iDλiD. J^i\widehat J^iJi is the maximum of eq. (16) over the reference profile, so that J^i(f)≤λiD\widehat J^i(f)\le\lambda^iDJi(f)≤λiD is exactly (14d). Ψ\PsiΨ and the thresholds are sInf/sSup over sets that are nonempty and compact for size vectors in the simplex, and every statement keeps size vectors there. Statements about "the" equilibrium are stated for every BWE, and existence of a BWE is a separate item, so they are not vacuous. The thresholds are defined from the optimal set of the auxiliary program, not assumed as parameters. Taking them as parameters constrained only by Lemma 4 would give a different theorem.

Disclosed deviations: Lemma 2's C2C^2C2 clause assumes C1C^1C1 costs; Lemma 3 is stated for populations of positive size; Lemma 5 assumes λj>0\lambda^j>0λj>0; Proposition 3 is stated with strict monotonicity in the side regimes, as used in the proof of Theorem 3. Contributions of reusable infrastructure are welcome: interval-integral potentials of monotone costs, KKT theory for polyhedral constraints, and directional derivatives of parametric optimal values.

Selected references

  • M. Wu, S. Amin, A. Ozdaglar, Value of Information in Bayesian Routing Games, Operations Research 69(1):148–163, 2021. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.2020.1999
  • W. H. Sandholm, Potential Games with Continuous Player Sets, Journal of Economic Theory 97(1):81–108, 2001. https://doi.org/10.1006/jeth.2000.2696
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Directional Differentiability of the Optimal Value Function in a Nonlinear Programming Problem, in Sensitivity, Stability and Parametric Analysis (Mathematical Programming Studies 21), Springer, 1984, pp. 213–226.
  • A. V. Fiacco, J. Kyparisis, Convexity and Concavity Properties of the Optimal Value Function in Parametric Nonlinear Programming, Journal of Optimization Theory and Applications 48(1):95–126, 1986.
15 thms2 active usersReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryOperations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

On the Global Convergence of Stochastic Fictitious Play I: Every Additive Random Utility Choice Function Has an Admissible Deterministic Perturbation RepresentationResearch Paper

Motivation

Models of learning in games, and discrete choice models in econometrics, describe an agent who does not always pick the best alternative. Two descriptions of such an agent are standard. In the additive random utility model (McFadden 1981; Anderson, de Palma and Thisse 1992) the agent maximizes payoffs perturbed by random shocks. In the deterministic perturbation model (Fudenberg and Levine 1998) the agent chooses a probability vector and pays a deterministic, strictly convex cost for it. The logit choice rule arises from both: from i.i.d. extreme-value shocks, and from the entropy cost V(y)=η∑jyjln⁡yjV(y) = \eta \sum_j y_j \ln y_jV(y)=η∑j​yj​lnyj​.

Hofbauer and Sandholm (Econometrica 70 (2002)) show that the second description is general enough to cover the first for every shock distribution with a strictly positive density, not only for logit. Their analysis of stochastic fictitious play rests on this: the deterministic representation provides the perturbed payoff functions from which Lyapunov functions for the learning dynamics are built, for arbitrary noise. This mission formalizes that discrete choice theorem, Theorem 2.1 of the paper, together with the steps of its proof.

Setting

Fix n≥1n \ge 1n≥1 alternatives A={1,…,n}A = \{1, \dots, n\}A={1,…,n} with base payoffs π=(π1,…,πn)∈Rn\pi = (\pi_1, \dots, \pi_n) \in \mathbb{R}^nπ=(π1​,…,πn​)∈Rn. A random vector ε=(ε1,…,εn)\varepsilon = (\varepsilon_1, \dots, \varepsilon_n)ε=(ε1​,…,εn​) has a strictly positive density f:Rn→Rf : \mathbb{R}^n \to \mathbb{R}f:Rn→R, whose law does not depend on π\piπ. The agent chooses the alternative whose total payoff πj+εj\pi_j + \varepsilon_jπj​+εj​ is largest, which gives the choice probability function C:Rn→RnC : \mathbb{R}^n \to \mathbb{R}^nC:Rn→Rn,

Ci(π)=P(argmax⁡j πj+εj=i).C_i(\pi) = P\big(\operatorname{argmax}_j\, \pi_j + \varepsilon_j = i\big).Ci​(π)=P(argmaxj​πj​+εj​=i).

The probability simplex is ΔA={x∈R+n:∑jxj=1}\Delta A = \{x \in \mathbb{R}^n_+ : \sum_j x_j = 1\}ΔA={x∈R+n​:∑j​xj​=1}, with relative interior int⁡(ΔA)\operatorname{int}(\Delta A)int(ΔA) (all coordinates positive) and tangent space R0n={z∈Rn:∑jzj=0}\mathbb{R}^n_0 = \{z \in \mathbb{R}^n : \sum_j z_j = 0\}R0n​={z∈Rn:∑j​zj​=0}.

A deterministic perturbation is a function V:int⁡(ΔA)→RV : \operatorname{int}(\Delta A) \to \mathbb{R}V:int(ΔA)→R. Because VVV lives on the relative interior, its gradient ∇V(y)\nabla V(y)∇V(y) is the vector of R0n\mathbb{R}^n_0R0n​ with V(y+hz)=V(y)+(∇V(y)⋅z)h+o(h)V(y + hz) = V(y) + (\nabla V(y) \cdot z) h + o(h)V(y+hz)=V(y)+(∇V(y)⋅z)h+o(h) for all z∈R0nz \in \mathbb{R}^n_0z∈R0n​, and its second derivative D2V(y)D^2 V(y)D2V(y) is a quadratic form on R0n\mathbb{R}^n_0R0n​. The perturbation is admissible if VVV is twice continuously differentiable along the simplex, D2V(y)D^2V(y)D2V(y) is positive definite on R0n\mathbb{R}^n_0R0n​ for every yyy, and ∥∇V(y)∥→∞\|\nabla V(y)\| \to \infty∥∇V(y)∥→∞ as yyy approaches the boundary of ΔA\Delta AΔA.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.1

If ε\varepsilonε has a strictly positive density and CCC is continuously differentiable, then there is an admissible VVV such that, for every π∈Rn\pi \in \mathbb{R}^nπ∈Rn,

C(π)=argmax⁡y∈int⁡(ΔA)(y⋅π−V(y)),C(\pi) = \operatorname*{argmax}_{y \in \operatorname{int}(\Delta A)} \big( y \cdot \pi - V(y) \big),C(π)=y∈int(ΔA)argmax​(y⋅π−V(y)),

with a unique maximizer. The perturbation VVV is one function serving all payoff vectors at once.

Milestones

The milestones are the steps of the paper's proof (pp. 5–7), in order:

  1. Eq. (4). DC(π)DC(\pi)DC(π) is symmetric, ∂Ci/∂πj=∂Cj/∂πi\partial C_i/\partial \pi_j = \partial C_j / \partial \pi_i∂Ci​/∂πj​=∂Cj​/∂πi​, and its off-diagonal terms are strictly negative.
  2. Eq. (5). ∂Ci/∂πi=−∑j≠i∂Cj/∂πi\partial C_i/\partial \pi_i = -\sum_{j \ne i} \partial C_j/\partial \pi_i∂Ci​/∂πi​=−∑j=i​∂Cj​/∂πi​, and DC(π)1=0DC(\pi)\mathbf{1} = 0DC(π)1=0.
  3. Eq. (6). z⋅DC(π)z>0z \cdot DC(\pi) z > 0z⋅DC(π)z>0 whenever zzz is not proportional to 1\mathbf{1}1.
  4. Shift invariance and injectivity. C(π+c1)=C(π)C(\pi + c\mathbf{1}) = C(\pi)C(π+c1)=C(π), and CCC is one-to-one on R0n\mathbb{R}^n_0R0n​.
  5. Range observation. If the payoffs πj\pi_jπj​, j∈Jj \in Jj∈J, stay bounded while the others tend to +∞+\infty+∞, then Cj(π)→0C_j(\pi) \to 0Cj​(π)→0 for j∈Jj \in Jj∈J.
  6. Convex potential. There is W:Rn→RW : \mathbb{R}^n \to \mathbb{R}W:Rn→R with ∇W≡C\nabla W \equiv C∇W≡C, strictly convex on R0n\mathbb{R}^n_0R0n​.
  7. Range. CCC takes values in int⁡(ΔA)\operatorname{int}(\Delta A)int(ΔA), and C(R0n)=int⁡(ΔA)C(\mathbb{R}^n_0) = \operatorname{int}(\Delta A)C(R0n​)=int(ΔA).

Significance

The result. Theorem 2.1 lets any smooth additive random utility model be replaced by an optimizing agent with a strictly convex, boundary-repelling cost. In the paper this is the bridge from the perturbed best response dynamic to a deterministic perturbed-payoff formulation, which yields Lyapunov functions for zero-sum games, games with an interior evolutionarily stable strategy, and potential games (§4 of the paper), and so the almost sure convergence of stochastic fictitious play under general noise (Theorem 6.1). Without it those convergence results would be restricted to noise distributions whose choice rule has a known deterministic representation, essentially logit. The paper also shows (Proposition 2.2) that the converse fails when n≥4n \ge 4n≥4: deterministic perturbations generate strictly more choice rules than random utility.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved on paper; no machine-checked proof of it is known. The mission asks for a formal proof of Theorem 2.1 and the seven steps above. Along the way it requires symmetric Jacobians of probability integrals, a gradient-field potential on Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn, and the Legendre transform of a strictly convex function restricted to a hyperplane. None of these is currently packaged in Mathlib in the needed form.

Difficulty

The obvious argument is to take VVV to be the Legendre transform of the potential W(π)=Emax⁡j(πj+εj)W(\pi) = \mathbb{E}\max_j(\pi_j + \varepsilon_j)W(π)=Emaxj​(πj​+εj​) and read off the first-order conditions. Three steps of that argument are not routine. First, the derivative identity (4) is a change of variables inside an (n−1)(n-1)(n−1)-fold integral over a moving region, and its strict sign needs the density to be positive on the relevant hyperplane sections. Second, the Legendre transform is well defined on all of int⁡(ΔA)\operatorname{int}(\Delta A)int(ΔA) only if CCC maps R0n\mathbb{R}^n_0R0n​ onto the whole open simplex. The paper takes this from Theorem 26.5 of Rockafellar (1970), whose hypotheses (essential smoothness, strict convexity, identification of the conjugate's domain) must be checked here. Third, positive definiteness of D2VD^2VD2V and the gradient blow-up at the boundary are statements about the inverse of CCC on R0n\mathbb{R}^n_0R0n​. They need an inverse function argument on a subspace and a properness argument, not only pointwise convexity.

Verifying that C(π)C(\pi)C(π) satisfies the first-order condition for one fixed π\piπ does not suffice: the goal requires a single VVV for all π\piπ, and a unique maximizer.

Formalization scope

Alternatives are indexed by Fin n with n≥1n \ge 1n≥1; vectors are Fin n → ℝ with its sup norm. The density is a real function fff that is continuous, strictly positive at every point, and has ∫f=1\int f = 1∫f=1; the law of ε\varepsilonε is Lebesgue measure weighted by fff. The paper's formula (4) evaluates fff on hyperplanes, which is meaningful for a continuous fff. Without continuity the theorem can fail: a density that is positive everywhere but tends to zero near a hyperplane can make CCC continuously differentiable with a vanishing off-diagonal derivative, and then no twice differentiable VVV represents CCC. Continuous differentiability of CCC is a hypothesis, as in the paper, stated as ContDiff ℝ 1 of the map π↦C(π)\pi \mapsto C(\pi)π↦C(π). The event "iii is the argmax" uses strict inequalities; ties have probability zero.

VVV is a function on Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn of which only the values on int⁡(ΔA)\operatorname{int}(\Delta A)int(ΔA) enter. Its smoothness and second derivative are taken in the chart z↦V(y+z)z \mapsto V(y + z)z↦V(y+z) on the subspace R0n\mathbb{R}^n_0R0n​. ∇V(y)\nabla V(y)∇V(y) is the tangent gradient of the paper's footnote 3, not an ambient gradient of an extension. The boundary blow-up is stated uniformly: for every MMM there is δ>0\delta > 0δ>0 such that every tangent gradient at an interior point with some coordinate below δ\deltaδ has norm above MMM.

The goal cannot be satisfied trivially. VVV must be chosen before π\piπ, all three admissibility conditions are part of the definition, and the maximizer must be unique. Weakening any of these (a VVV depending on π\piπ, a VVV without second derivatives, a non-strict maximum) changes the theorem.

Reusable infrastructure: differentiation of choice probabilities under a density, potentials of symmetric C1C^1C1 vector fields on Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn, and Legendre duality for strictly convex functions on a subspace. Contributions of any of these as separate lemmas are welcome, as are alternative proofs of the milestones, for instance obtaining the potential directly as Emax⁡j(πj+εj)\mathbb{E}\max_j(\pi_j + \varepsilon_j)Emaxj​(πj​+εj​).

Selected references

  • J. Hofbauer and W. H. Sandholm, On the Global Convergence of Stochastic Fictitious Play, Econometrica 70(6), 2265–2294, 2002. https://doi.org/10.1111/1468-0262.00376 (theorem numbers and pages here follow the authors' manuscript of February 21, 2002).
  • D. Fudenberg and D. K. Levine, The Theory of Learning in Games, MIT Press, 1998.
  • S. P. Anderson, A. de Palma and J.-F. Thisse, Discrete Choice Theory of Product Differentiation, MIT Press, 1992.
  • D. McFadden, Econometric Models of Probabilistic Choice, in C. F. Manski and D. McFadden (eds.), Structural Analysis of Discrete Data with Econometric Applications, MIT Press, 1981.
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
Discrete GeometryOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: Shuze Chen

Discrete Convex Analysis XXXV: Gross Substitutes and Equilibrium PricesTextbook

Motivation

This mission continues chapter 11's account of the M♮-concave/M♮-convex exchange-economy model begun in mission 14-economic-equilibrium, placing seven of that chunk's own results that were previously left out-of-cone: the two gross-substitutes-style characterizations of M♮-concavity (§11.3), the transfer theorem that lifts an equilibrium of the continuous relaxation to one for indivisible commodities (§11.4), and the explicit polyhedral description of the equilibrium price set together with its feasibility criterion (§11.5).

Setting

Mission 14-economic-equilibrium built the exchange-economy vocabulary this mission redeclares in full (UDom, ArgMaxBot/ArgMinTop, PriceShift/PriceShiftConvex, DemandSet/SupplySet, IsEquilibrium, MNaturalConcave, IsMNaturalConvexSet, the concave/convex closures ConcaveClosureR/ConvexClosureR and their continuous analogues ContDemandSet/ContSupplySet/ IsContEquilibrium) and placed the qualitative structural theorems (Theorems 11.1-11.3, 11.4, 11.16-11.18, 11.23-11.24). This mission adds the gross-substitutes axioms (−M♮-GS[Z], the price-monotonicity property NegGS, and −M♮-SWGS[Z], its one-price-at-a-time refinement NegSWGS), the M♮-convex-set transfer machinery connecting a continuous equilibrium to a discrete one, and the equilibrium price polyhedron built from the three bound families ℓ(j), u(j), u(i,j) (Eqs. (11.40)-(11.42)) that make Theorem 11.16's qualitative L♮-convex-polyhedron fact concrete and linear-programming-checkable.

Formalization targets

Goal: The equilibrium price set is the explicit L♮-convex polyhedron (11.43) (Theorem 11.21)

For a fixed allocation (x,y), the set P* of all equilibrium price vectors is an L♮-convex polyhedron and equals the polyhedron cut out by max{0,ℓ(j)} ≤ p(j) ≤ u(j) and p(j)-p(i) ≤ u(i,j). Chosen as goal: it is the sharpest structural result of chapter 11's computation section, upgrading Theorem 11.16's qualitative fact to a concrete description, and is what Theorem 11.22 (also placed) builds on directly.

Supporting structural targets

Theorem 11.5 and Theorem 11.6 characterize M♮-concavity via the gross-substitutes and stepwise gross-substitutes properties, completing chapter 11's suite of M♮-concavity characterizations begun with Theorem 11.4 (mission 14). Theorem 11.15 is the general transfer theorem (continuous equilibrium ⟹ discrete equilibrium) that mission 14's own Theorem 11.14 invokes as a special case. Theorem 11.22 gives the feasibility criterion for the existence of an equilibrium price vector, the mission's second theorem built on the equilibrium price polyhedron.

Significance

Together with mission 14-economic-equilibrium, this mission completes the book's account of how M♮-concavity/convexity — a purely combinatorial exchange condition — reproduces, and sharpens, the classical gross-substitutes theory of competitive equilibrium for economies with indivisible goods: existence transfers from the continuous relaxation, and the equilibrium price set itself has a description exact enough to reduce to a linear feasibility question. None of these results are open — they are Murota's own account (attributed in the book's own notes to Danilov-Koshevoy- Lang and Murota-Tamura for the gross-substitutes theorems, and to Murota-Tamura for the equilibrium price polyhedron); this mission contributes a faithful, machine-checked formal statement of each (see Formalization scope).

Difficulty

Two of this chunk's seven BRIEF.md results are not drafted this pass, for a disclosed time- budget reason rather than any faithfulness failure: Proposition 11.19 and Theorem 11.20 require the H,L-indexed bipartite MSFP2 flow-network vocabulary (separate vertex sets V+_e, V+_l, V-_h, an M-convex/M-concave-combining flow objective) that neither this mission nor mission 14 builds, and building it in proportion to placing exactly these two results was judged disproportionate to the remaining time in this pass; see HARD.md and STATUS.md. This is explicitly not a hard exclusion — both results are well-posed and provable from the book's own complete proofs — and is recorded as an honest scope limitation for a future pass. Theorem 11.22's own trailing algorithmic remark (that equilibrium prices can be found via a shortest-path computation, yielding a polynomial-time equilibrium-checking algorithm) is a computational/ complexity claim outside this series' propositional-formalization methodology and is omitted; the mathematical "iff feasibility" content is placed in full. See HARD.md.

Formalization scope

Ground set K is a Fintype with DecidableEq; consumer/producer index sets H, L are Fintypes (Nonempty where the price-bound formulas (11.40)-(11.42) need a nonempty sup'/inf' range). All base vocabulary is redeclared fresh from mission 14-economic-equilibrium's own definitions, since this draft cannot import that sibling mission. The gross-substitutes axioms are formalized directly from their defining inequalities (Eqs. preceding (11.19) and following, and p.331); the equilibrium price polyhedron's bound families ℓ(j)/u(j)/u(i,j) are formalized literally from Eqs. (11.40)-(11.42), extracting each WithBot ℝ/WithTop ℝ operand to ℝ before subtracting (since WithBot ℝ carries no subtraction instance). Two results (Proposition 11.19, Theorem 11.20) are not drafted this pass for the disclosed time-budget reason above; one result (Theorem 11.22's trailing algorithmic remark) is scoped out as computational content. Contributions completing any of the five sorrys, or building the MSFP2 vocabulary to place Proposition 11.19/Theorem 11.20 in a follow-up mission, are welcome.

Selected references

  • K. Murota, Discrete Convex Analysis, SIAM, 2003. DOI: 10.1137/1.9780898718508.
  • V. Danilov, G. Koshevoy, K. Murota, "Discrete convexity and equilibria in economies with indivisible goods and money," Mathematical Social Sciences, 41 (2001), pp. 251-273 [33] (origin of the gross-substitutes characterization, Theorem 11.6).
  • K. Murota, A. Tamura, "Application of M-convex submodular flow problem to mathematical economics," Japan Journal of Industrial and Applied Mathematics, 20 (2003), pp. 257-277 [160] (origin of the equilibrium price polyhedron, Theorems 11.20-11.22).
41 thms2 active usersReviewed
Discrete GeometryOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: Shuze Chen

Discrete Convex Analysis XXXI: The Potential Criterion for Network FlowsTextbook

Motivation

Chapter 9 is where discrete convex analysis meets classical network flow theory: the minimum cost flow problem's three hallmark properties — an optimality criterion by potentials, an optimality criterion by negative cycles, and integrality of optimal solutions — are shown to survive, in a precise and increasingly general form, first for arbitrary polyhedral convex costs (MCFP3), then for the M-convex submodular flow problem (MSFP2/MSFP3), the chapter's own combinatorial generalization of the classical problem. This mission places the potential criterion (Theorem 9.4) and its cascade of six corollaries and generalizations, the block of results this book's own text uses to carry every other result in the chapter.

Setting

A digraph G = (V,A) with tail/head maps ∂⁺,∂⁻ : A → V. A flow ξ : A → R has boundary ∂ξ(v) = Σ{ξ(a) : ∂⁺a=v} − Σ{ξ(a) : ∂⁻a=v}. A potential p : V → R has coboundary δp(a) = p(∂⁺a) − p(∂⁻a). The minimum cost flow problem MCFP3 minimizes Γ₃(ξ) = Σₐ fₐ(ξ(a)) + f(∂ξ) over flows, for polyhedral convex arc costs fₐ : R → R∪{+∞} and boundary cost f : Rⱽ → R∪{+∞}; MCFP0 is its linear-cost, fixed-supply special case. The M-convex submodular flow problem MSFP3 is MCFP3 with f additionally M-convex; MSFP2 is its linear-arc-cost special case.

Formalization targets

Goal: The potential criterion for MCFP3 (Theorem 9.4)

For a feasible flow ξ, ξ is optimal for MCFP3 iff there is a potential p with ξ(a) a minimizer of the reduced arc cost fₐ[δp(a)] for every arc and ∂ξ a minimizer of the reduced boundary cost f[−p]; and any such optimal potential characterizes optimality of every feasible flow. This is the hub result of the whole chunk: the book states Theorem 9.14 is "immediate" from it, and every other placed result either specializes it directly or builds on that specialization.

Supporting structural targets

Theorem 9.5 reformulates MCFP0's optimality as the absence of a negative cycle in an auxiliary network; Theorem 9.6 gives MCFP0's primal and dual integrality, the latter identifying the optimal-potential set as an L-convex polyhedron. Theorem 9.14 specializes the goal to MSFP3; Theorem 9.15 upgrades this to a full polyhedral and integrality structure theorem for MSFP3's optimal-flow-boundary and optimal-potential sets (M2-convex and L-convex polyhedra respectively); Theorem 9.16 is the integer-flow analogue, with the boundary set now literally M2-convex and the integer-optimal-potential set literally L-convex. Theorems 9.18 and 9.20 give the negative-cycle reformulation for MSFP2, real and integer flows respectively, generalizing Theorem 9.5 by admitting a third class of auxiliary arcs governed by the M-convex boundary cost's directional derivative (or its discrete difference, in the integer case).

Significance

This is the chapter's demonstration that M-convexity is not merely an abstract combinatorial axiom but the exact structural hypothesis under which classical network-flow duality survives intact: every one of the four "nice properties" the book opens the chapter with (potentials, negative cycles, integrality, efficient algorithms) is preserved verbatim in the M-convex generalization, and this mission's eight results are the proof of that claim for the first three. The chunk's own internal dependency structure — one foundational theorem (9.4) from which every other placed result descends by specialization or direct generalization — is itself characteristic of how this book organizes its combinatorial machinery around a single convex- analytic core.

None of these results are open — they are Murota's own account of network flow duality under M-convexity (sections 9.1, 9.4, and 9.5). What this mission contributes is a faithful, machine-checked formal statement of each, extending the platform's coverage of chapter 9 begun in mission 12-network-flows (which covered §9.1.1-9.1.2 and §9.3, the feasibility and max-flow min-cut results, deliberately leaving this block for later apparatus); no comparable formalization exists on the platform (see Formalization scope).

Difficulty

The eight results span real- and integer-flow versions of two nested problem hierarchies (MCFP0 ⊂ MCFP3, MSFP2 ⊂ MSFP3) and two distinct optimality certificates (potentials, negative cycles), which this mission handles by building one shared apparatus — FeasibleFlowMCFP3, Gamma3, OptimalFlowMCFP3, IsOptimalPotential — that MCFP0 and MSFP3 both instantiate (MCFP0 literally as the linear-cost/singleton-boundary special case of Eq. (9.11)), and one shared generic cycle/negative-cycle apparatus (IsCycle, CycleLength, HasNegativeCycle) instantiated three times with different auxiliary-arc types (A⊕A for MCFP0, A⊕A⊕(V×V) for MSFP2's extra Cξ arcs governed by the boundary cost's directional derivative). "Primal integral" and "dual integral" polyhedral convex functions (the book's own C[Z|R→R]/C[R→R|Z] notation, used in Theorem 9.15) needed a modeling decision, since the book's own definition of these classes lies outside this chunk's page range; see Formalization scope.

Formalization scope

Ground-set vertices V and arcs A are Fintype with DecidableEq. All base M-/L-convexity vocabulary is redeclared from prior missions in this series. "Primal integral" (C[Z|R→R], M[Z|R→R]) is formalized as integer effective domain (IsDomainIntegerArc/IsDomainIntegerR); "dual integral" (C[R→R|Z], M[R→R|Z]) is formalized as the existence of an integer subgradient at every domain point (IsDualIntegralArc/IsDualIntegralR) — a standard equivalent characterization for polyhedral convex functions, and a deliberate modeling choice recorded in MODERATION_NOTES.md rather than a literal transcription of the book's own (out-of-range) definition of these two notation classes. All eight numbered results found in this chunk's page range are placed in full, with no partial-coverage scope reduction. Contributions completing any of the eight sorrys are welcome; the goal and Theorem 9.15 carry the most independent proof content.

Selected references

  • K. Murota, Discrete Convex Analysis, SIAM, 2003. DOI: 10.1137/1.9780898718508.
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Network Flows and Monotropic Optimization, Wiley, 1984 [178] (the classical potential/Fenchel-duality framework this mission's Theorem 9.4 adapts).
  • K. Murota, "Discrete convex analysis," Mathematical Programming, 83 (1998), pp. 313-371 [140] (the Lagrange duality and negative-cycle theory of section 9.5 this mission's Theorems 9.18 and 9.20 draw from).
88 thms2 active usersReviewed
Discrete GeometryOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: Shuze Chen

Discrete Convex Analysis XXIX: M2-Convex and L2-Convex FunctionsTextbook

Motivation

Mission 29-ch08b-conjugacyduality opened chapter 8's account of M2-convex functions — sums of M-convex functions — proving their domains and minimizers are M2-convex and that they are integrally convex. This mission completes that program and builds its exact mirror for L2-convex functions (integer infimal convolutions of L-convex functions), the class that appears on the opposite side of Edmonds's intersection theorem's min-max relation from M2-convexity. It proves optimality and proximity theorems for both classes, shows their subdifferentials add (a discrete analogue of the classical subdifferential sum rule), derives how the Legendre-Fenchel transform interacts with the sum/infimal-convolution operation, and — the technically hardest result in the whole cluster — establishes that L♮₂-convex functions are integrally convex, by a genuinely different and more intricate argument than the M2-side analogue required.

Setting

Fix a finite ground set VVV. A function g:ZV→R∪{+∞}g : \mathbb Z^V \to \mathbb R \cup \{+\infty\}g:ZV→R∪{+∞} is L2-convex if g=g1□g2g = g_1 \square g_2g=g1​□g2​, the integer infimal convolution g1□g2(p)=inf⁡{g1(p1)+g2(p2):p1+p2=p}g_1\square g_2(p) = \inf\{g_1(p_1)+g_2(p_2) : p_1+p_2=p\}g1​□g2​(p)=inf{g1​(p1​)+g2​(p2​):p1​+p2​=p}, of two L-convex functions g1,g2g_1, g_2g1​,g2​; L2♮^\natural_22♮​-convex if the summands are L♮^\natural♮-convex. An M2-convex function is a sum f1+f2f_1+f_2f1​+f2​ of two M-convex functions (mission 29-ch08b-conjugacyduality). The integer subdifferential ∂Zf(x)\partial_{\mathbb Z} f(x)∂Z​f(x) and real subdifferential ∂Rf(x)\partial_{\mathbb R} f(x)∂R​f(x) generalize the subgradient set to integer- and real-valued perturbation directions respectively.

Formalization targets

Goal: L2♮^\natural_22♮​-convex functions are integrally convex (Theorem 8.42)

Every L2♮^\natural_22♮​-convex function is integrally convex, and in particular every L2♮^\natural_22♮​-convex set is integrally convex. The book's own proof is the most intricate argument in this cluster: given ppp in the Minkowski sum D1+D2D_1+D_2D1​+D2​ of two L-convex sets, it constructs an explicit representation of ppp as a convex combination of finitely many integer points of D1+D2D_1+D_2D1​+D2​, all lying in ppp's own integral neighborhood, via the sorted fractional-part values of a chosen decomposition p=p1+p2p=p_1+p_2p=p1​+p2​ — a genuinely different technique from the M2-side analogue (Theorem 8.31), whose proof is a two-line consequence of convex extensibility.

Supporting structural targets

Eleven further results build the M2-/L2-convex theory in parallel. Theorems 8.33-8.34 give the M2-optimality criterion (a nonnegative-sum condition over cyclic exchange families) and its scaling-based proximity theorem; Theorem 8.35 shows subdifferentials of a sum of M♮^\natural♮- convex functions add, and that subdifferentials of M2-/M2♮^\natural_22♮​-convex functions are L2-/L2♮^\natural_22♮​-convex; Theorem 8.36 computes the conjugate of a sum as the infimal convolution of conjugates, with biconjugacy recovering the original sum. Propositions 8.39-8.41 transfer L-(natural-)convexity from summands to the domain and minimizer set of an L2-convex function, and give the precise attainment condition under which a linearly-perturbed infimal convolution's minimizer set splits additively. Theorems 8.43-8.44 give the L2-optimality and L2-proximity theorems, the exact L-side mirrors of Theorems 8.33-8.34; Theorem 8.45 mirrors Theorem 8.35 for subdifferentials of an infimal convolution; and Theorem 8.46 (found by direct reading, immediately following 8.45 and explicitly named by the book as 8.36's counterpart) shows biconjugacy for L♮^\natural♮-convex infimal convolutions.

Significance

The M2-/L2-convex function classes are where discrete convex analysis's abstract machinery meets concrete combinatorial optimization: Edmonds's matroid intersection theorem and its generalizations are literally statements about M2-convex minimization, with the L2-convex side supplying the dual bound. Theorem 8.35's subdifferential additivity is the discrete analogue of the classical Moreau-Rockafellar sum rule, and its proof (via the M-convex intersection theorem, already a milestone of mission 10-conjugacy-i) shows the sum rule holding without the constraint-qualification technicalities the continuous theory needs — a case where the discrete theory is cleaner than its continuous ancestor. Theorem 8.42's harder, dedicated proof technique is itself informative: it demonstrates that L2-convexity's combinatorial structure is not a routine transcription of the M2-convex case, foreshadowing the book's broader theme that M- and L-convexity, while conjugate, are not interchangeable in how their proofs actually work.

None of these results are open — they are Murota's account of the sum/infimal-convolution closure properties of M-convex and L-convex functions, continuing chapter 8's duality program into its most combinatorially concrete corner. What this mission contributes is a faithful, machine-checked formal statement of each, including one result (Theorem 8.46) the platform's own automated extractor missed, extending the shared Lean vocabulary (InfConv, L2Convex, M2ConvexSet) mission 29-ch08b-conjugacyduality began; no comparable formalization exists on the platform (see Formalization scope).

Difficulty

The naive approach to the goal would try to adapt the M2-side integral-convexity proof (a direct appeal to convex extensibility) verbatim; the book's own proof shows this does not work, requiring instead a from-scratch construction: decompose p=p1+p2p=p_1+p_2p=p1​+p2​, take fractional parts a1=p1−⌊p1⌋a_1 = p_1-\lfloor p_1\rfloora1​=p1​−⌊p1​⌋ and a2=⌈p2⌉−p2a_2=\lceil p_2\rceil-p_2a2​=⌈p2​⌉−p2​, sort their combined distinct values, build threshold sets exactly as in the Lovász-extension construction, and verify each resulting integer point qi=⌊p1⌋+χU1i+⌈p2⌉−χU2iq_i = \lfloor p_1\rfloor+\chi_{U_{1i}}+\lceil p_2\rceil-\chi_{U_{2i}}qi​=⌊p1​⌋+χU1i​​+⌈p2​⌉−χU2i​​ both lies in D1+D2D_1+D_2D1​+D2​ (via L-convex-set closure properties, Theorem 5.10) and in ppp's integral neighborhood (a case split on whether p(v)p(v)p(v) is itself an integer) — a genuinely multi-stage combinatorial argument with no single-inequality shortcut, unlike almost every other result in this mission.

Formalization scope

Ground-set elements are a Fintype V with DecidableEq; M2-/L2-convex functions are (V→ℤ)→WithTop ℝ. All twelve numbered results found in this chunk's page range are placed, with no partial-coverage scope reduction needed — every clause of every result, including all three parts of Theorems 8.35 and 8.45 and the full cyclic-exchange condition of Theorems 8.33-8.34, is stated in full. One numbered result nominally in this chunk's page range, Theorem 8.32, is not re-placed here: it was already found and placed as a milestone in mission 29-ch08b-conjugacyduality, whose own page range overlaps this chunk's by one page (PDF245) — see HARD.md. "g1□g2 > −∞" hypotheses are omitted rather than translated, since WithTop ℝ has no −∞ element to violate. This mission's base vocabulary is redeclared verbatim from mission 29-ch08b-conjugacyduality rather than imported, since sibling drafts in this series cannot yet reference one another; ConvexConjugate is redeclared from mission 10-conjugacy-i. Contributions completing any of the twelve sorrys are welcome; the goal and Theorem 8.35 carry the most independent proof content.

Selected references

  • K. Murota, Discrete Convex Analysis, SIAM, 2003. DOI: 10.1137/1.9780898718508.
  • K. Murota and A. Shioura, "Extreme points of a generalized polymatroid," Discrete Applied Mathematics, 152 (2005), pp. 268-278 [153] (the L2-convex integral-convexity proof this mission's goal is drawn from).
  • K. Murota and A. Tamura, "Application of M-convex submodular flow problem to mathematical economics," Japan Journal of Industrial and Applied Mathematics, 20 (2003), pp. 257-277 [162] (the M2-proximity theorem, Theorem 8.34).
55 thms2 active usersReviewed
Discrete GeometryOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: Shuze Chen

Discrete Convex Analysis XXVIII: The Conjugacy TheoremTextbook

Motivation

Chapter 8 is where discrete convex analysis explains why it needed two separate notions — M-convexity (exchangeability) and L-convexity (submodularity) — rather than one. The answer is conjugacy: under the classical Legendre-Fenchel transform, the two classes turn out to be exactly dual to each other, the discrete analogue of the fact that convex analysis's transform is self-dual within a single class of convex functions. Mission 10-conjugacy-i proved the integer-lattice version of this fact (Theorem 8.12) but explicitly deferred the polyhedral version — Theorem 8.4, the chapter's own headline "Conjugacy theorem" — noting it needed a real-variable M-/L-convex-function layer the series had not yet built. That layer now exists, built across missions 23-24-ch06*-mconvexfunctions and 26-27-ch07*-lconvexfunctions. This mission proves Theorem 8.4 and its companions: the polar-cone correspondence it induces, its nonpolyhedral generalization, the separation and Fenchel-duality theorems for M♮-/L♮-convex functions, and the basic theory of M2-convex functions (sums of M-convex functions), which the Edmonds intersection theorem's own combinatorics is built from.

Setting

Fix a finite ground set VVV. For f:RV→R∪{+∞}f : \mathbb R^V \to \mathbb R \cup \{+\infty\}f:RV→R∪{+∞}, the Legendre-Fenchel transform is f∙(p)=sup⁡x[⟨p,x⟩−f(x)]f^\bullet(p) = \sup_x [\langle p,x\rangle - f(x)]f∙(p)=supx​[⟨p,x⟩−f(x)]. A polyhedral convex function fff is M-convex (f∈M[R→R]f \in M[\mathbb R \to \mathbb R]f∈M[R→R]) if it satisfies (M-EXC[R]); ggg is L-convex (g∈L[R→R]g \in L[\mathbb R \to \mathbb R]g∈L[R→R]) if it satisfies (SBF[R]) and (TRF[R]). A concave function hhh is always represented via h2=−hh_2 = -hh2​=−h, an ordinary convex function, so every "f≥hf \ge hf≥h" hypothesis is restated as "f+h2≥0f + h_2 \ge 0f+h2​≥0" — an equivalent formulation avoiding any need to represent −∞-\infty−∞ in the codomain. A polyhedral cone's polar is C∘={y:⟨y,x⟩≤0 ∀x∈C}C^\circ = \{y : \langle y,x\rangle \le 0\ \forall x \in C\}C∘={y:⟨y,x⟩≤0 ∀x∈C}. A function is M2-convex if it is the sum of two M-convex functions.

Formalization targets

Goal: the conjugacy theorem (Theorem 8.4)

The classes of polyhedral M-convex functions and polyhedral L-convex functions are in one-to-one correspondence under the Legendre-Fenchel transform: f∈M⇒f∙∈Lf \in M \Rightarrow f^\bullet \in Lf∈M⇒f∙∈L, g∈L⇒g∙∈Mg \in L \Rightarrow g^\bullet \in Mg∈L⇒g∙∈M, and the transform is an involution (f∙∙=ff^{\bullet\bullet}=ff∙∙=f, g∙∙=gg^{\bullet\bullet}=gg∙∙=g) on each class, with the identical statement for the M♮^\natural♮/L♮^\natural♮ variants. This is the theorem mission 10-conjugacy-i deferred, citing exactly the missing infrastructure this series has since built.

Supporting structural targets

Twelve further results build the surrounding theory. Proposition 8.2 gives the easy two-variable case of the general submodularity-preservation fact (Theorem 8.1, already a milestone of mission 10-conjugacy-i); Proposition 8.3 is the technical minimizer-difference lemma the goal's harder direction is built from. Theorem 8.5 derives the M-convex/L-convex cone polarity from the goal, and Theorem 8.6 extends the correspondence beyond the polyhedral case to general closed proper convex functions. Proposition 8.14 and Theorems 8.15-8.16 build the separation theory for M♮-/L♮-convex and concave function pairs, with integral witnesses when the functions are integer valued; Theorem 8.21 (parts 1-2) derives the Fenchel-type strong-duality equality these separation theorems make possible. Propositions 8.29-8.30 and Theorem 8.31 (plus Theorem 8.32, found by direct reading immediately after 8.31) build the basic theory of M2-convex functions: their domains and minimizer sets are M2-convex, they are integrally convex, and their global optimality reduces to a finite local check.

Significance

The goal is the theorem that retroactively explains this entire series' two-track structure: missions 20-25 (M-convex sets and functions) and 08/21/26-28 (L-convex sets and functions) are not two independent theories that happen to share techniques — they are conjugate images of each other, so every theorem proved on one side has a dual counterpart automatically available on the other via Theorem 8.4. This is made concrete immediately: Theorem 8.5's cone polarity and the diagram the book draws connecting M0[R]M_0[\mathbb R]M0​[R], 0L[R→R]0L[\mathbb R\to\mathbb R]0L[R→R], and submodular set functions S[R]S[\mathbb R]S[R] (already correspondences this series proved independently, in missions 24-ch06d-mconvexfunctions and 28-ch07d-lconvexfunctions) are shown to be facets of one single conjugacy fact rather than three separate coincidences. The separation and Fenchel duality theorems (8.15, 8.16, 8.21) are the discrete analogues of the two theorems every convex optimization course opens with, and the book is explicit that they are not corollaries of the classical versions plus convex extensibility — they carry genuinely combinatorial content, specializing to Frank's discrete separation theorem and Edmonds's intersection theorem as examples the book itself gives.

None of these results are open — they are Murota's account of the duality at the heart of discrete convex analysis, the reason the theory needed two dual notions rather than one. What this mission contributes is a faithful, machine-checked formal statement of each, completing a theorem mission 10-conjugacy-i explicitly left for a future session once the necessary polyhedral apparatus existed, and including one result (Theorem 8.32) the platform's own automated extractor missed; no comparable formalization exists on the platform (see Formalization scope).

Difficulty

The naive approach to the goal's harder direction (L⇒M) would try to verify the exchange inequality for g∙g^\bulletg∙ directly from the definition of the transform; the book's actual proof instead identifies the exchange inequality with a statement about weighted minimizers of ggg itself via Proposition 8.3 (the minimizer-difference bound), converting a claim about the conjugate function into a claim about ggg's own combinatorial structure — a genuine change of perspective, not a direct calculation. Proposition 8.3's own proof is the hardest single argument in this block: it derives the minimizer-difference bound by a contradiction argument that constructs an explicit pair of "worse" minimizers via a join/meet perturbation and derives a strict inequality from Theorem 7.29's translation inequality — a multi-step combinatorial argument with no direct shortcut.

Formalization scope

Ground-set elements are a Fintype V with DecidableEq; convex functions are WithTop ℝ valued throughout (never EReal, except for the Legendre-Fenchel transform itself, whose defining supremum/infimum can genuinely be infinite). All thirteen numbered results found in this chunk's page range — the twelve in BRIEF.md's own table plus Theorem 8.32 — are placed, with one documented scope reduction: Theorem 8.21 states only its real-attainment parts (1)-(2), not the integer-attainment refinement of parts (3)-(4), which needs a separate argument no other result in this chunk requires — see HARD.md. Concave functions hhh are always represented via h2=−hh_2 = -hh2​=−h and every inequality f≥hf \ge hf≥h restated as f+h2≥0f + h_2 \ge 0f+h2​≥0, avoiding WithTop ℝ negation entirely. This chunk's own BRIEF.md inherited the chapters-4-7 page-offset boilerplate (printed = PDF −-− 19); chapter 8 uses offset 18, confirmed against the PDF's own footers — every citation here uses the corrected offset. This mission's base vocabulary is redeclared from missions 10-conjugacy-i, 20-ch04b-mconvexsets, 21-ch05b-lconvexsets, 23-24-ch06*-mconvexfunctions, and 26-27-ch07*-lconvexfunctions rather than imported, since sibling drafts in this series cannot yet reference one another. Contributions completing any of the thirteen sorrys are welcome; the goal and Proposition 8.3 carry the most independent proof content.

Selected references

  • K. Murota, Discrete Convex Analysis, SIAM, 2003. DOI: 10.1137/1.9780898718508.
  • K. Murota and A. Shioura, "M-convex function on generalized polymatroid," Mathematics of Operations Research, 24 (1999), pp. 95-105 [152] (the polyhedral M-/L-convex conjugacy theory this mission's real-variable results are drawn from).
73 thms2 active usersReviewed
Discrete GeometryOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: Shuze Chen

Discrete Convex Analysis IX: The Discrete Conjugacy TheoremTextbook

Motivation

The Legendre-Fenchel transform is the single most structurally important operation in convex analysis: for a proper closed convex function fff, its conjugate f∙(p)=sup⁡x{⟨p,x⟩−f(x)}f^\bullet(p) = \sup_x \{\langle p,x\rangle - f(x)\}f∙(p)=supx​{⟨p,x⟩−f(x)} is again proper closed convex, and the transform is an involution — f∙∙=ff^{\bullet\bullet} = ff∙∙=f. This one fact underlies duality theory across optimization: every strong-duality theorem is, at bottom, a statement about conjugate pairs. Chapters 6 and 7 of this book developed M-convex and L-convex functions as if they were two separate theories, each with its own exchange axiom, optimality criterion, and proximity theorem. Chapter 8 reveals they were never separate: the Legendre-Fenchel transform, suitably discretized, is a bijection between the two classes. This mission formalizes that discrete conjugacy theorem together with its classical real-valued precursor and a genuine function-level generalization of Edmonds's intersection theorem, completing the picture that chunks 06 through 09 built the two halves of.

Setting

Let VVV be a finite ground set. For f:RV→R∪{+∞}f : \mathbb R^V \to \mathbb R \cup \{+\infty\}f:RV→R∪{+∞}, the Legendre-Fenchel transform is f∙(p)=sup⁡{⟨p,x⟩−f(x):x∈RV}f^\bullet(p) = \sup\{\langle p,x\rangle - f(x) : x \in \mathbb R^V\}f∙(p)=sup{⟨p,x⟩−f(x):x∈RV}; fff is submodular if f(x)+f(y)≥f(x∨y)+f(x∧y)f(x)+f(y) \ge f(x\vee y)+f(x\wedge y)f(x)+f(y)≥f(x∨y)+f(x∧y) and supermodular under the reverse inequality. For f:ZV→R∪{+∞}f : \mathbb Z^V \to \mathbb R \cup \{+\infty\}f:ZV→R∪{+∞}, the discrete Legendre-Fenchel transform restricts the same supremum formula to p∈ZVp \in \mathbb Z^Vp∈ZV: f∙(p)=sup⁡{⟨p,x⟩−f(x):x∈ZV}f^\bullet(p) = \sup\{\langle p,x\rangle - f(x) : x \in \mathbb Z^V\}f∙(p)=sup{⟨p,x⟩−f(x):x∈ZV} for p∈ZVp \in \mathbb Z^Vp∈ZV — a genuinely different object from the real-valued transform, since the supremum is now over integer xxx only, and the codomain is checked back against the discrete M-/L-convexity axioms of chunks 06–09. The integer biconjugate f∙∙f^{\bullet\bullet}f∙∙ is the transform applied twice. fff is integer valued if every finite value it takes is an integer (the classes M[Z→Z]M[\mathbb Z\to\mathbb Z]M[Z→Z], L[Z→Z]L[\mathbb Z\to\mathbb Z]L[Z→Z] of the goal theorem are exactly the M-/L-convex functions with this property).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 8.12 (the discrete conjugacy theorem)

(1) The classes M[Z→Z]M[\mathbb Z\to\mathbb Z]M[Z→Z] and L[Z→Z]L[\mathbb Z\to\mathbb Z]L[Z→Z] are in one-to-one correspondence under the discrete Legendre-Fenchel transform: for f∈M[Z→Z]f \in M[\mathbb Z\to\mathbb Z]f∈M[Z→Z] and g∈L[Z→Z]g \in L[\mathbb Z\to\mathbb Z]g∈L[Z→Z], f∙∈L[Z→Z]f^\bullet \in L[\mathbb Z\to\mathbb Z]f∙∈L[Z→Z], g∙∈M[Z→Z]g^\bullet \in M[\mathbb Z\to\mathbb Z]g∙∈M[Z→Z], f∙∙=ff^{\bullet\bullet}=ff∙∙=f, and g∙∙=gg^{\bullet\bullet}=gg∙∙=g. (2) The same correspondence holds between M♮[Z→Z]M^\natural[\mathbb Z\to\mathbb Z]M♮[Z→Z] and L♮[Z→Z]L^\natural[\mathbb Z\to\mathbb Z]L♮[Z→Z].

Milestones: Theorem 8.1, Proposition 8.11, Theorem 8.17

Theorem 8.1: the conjugate of a real-valued submodular function is always supermodular — the classical warm-up, and evidence that submodularity/supermodularity is not symmetric under conjugation on its own (the converse fails). Proposition 8.11: the integer biconjugate recovers fff at any point with a nonempty integer subdifferential — the fact that makes discrete biconjugation meaningful at all. Theorem 8.17 (the M-convex intersection theorem): a point jointly minimizes a sum of two M♮^\natural♮-convex functions if and only if a single linear functional separately certifies it as a minimizer of each perturbed function — the function-level generalization of chunk 04's Edmonds's intersection theorem for M-convex sets.

Significance

The result itself. The discrete conjugacy theorem is, in the book's own words, "the unifying result of the entire book": every theorem proved separately for M-convex functions (chunks 06–07) has an exact mirror for L-convex functions (chunks 08–09) precisely because the Legendre-Fenchel transform carries one class to the other. Theorem 8.17's function-level Edmonds generalization shows the payoff directly — the classical matroid-intersection-style min-max duality of chunk 04 was never really about sets; it is a special case (indicator functions) of a duality that holds for the whole class of M-convex functions.

Formalizing it. No matching item exists on the platform for conjugate functions, discrete conjugacy, or this generality of intersection theorem. This mission gives the first formal statement of the discrete conjugacy theorem, distinguishing it carefully from its real-valued (polyhedral) precursor, Theorem 8.4 — a genuinely different, harder theorem this mission does not draft (see Formalization scope), since the integer bijection needs the M-/L-proximity theorems of chunks 06–09 to control integrality under convex extension, while the real-valued case does not.

Difficulty

The obvious approach — try to prove the discrete conjugacy theorem directly by mimicking the real-valued proof (Theorem 8.4) with ℤ in place of ℝ everywhere — fails, because the real-valued proof's key step (Proposition 8.3, an infimal-convolution argument comparing arg min sets of perturbed polyhedral functions) has no immediate discrete analogue: a discrete arg min need not vary continuously with the perturbation the way a polyhedral one does. The book's actual strategy instead routes through the convex extension of the discrete function (chunk 06/08's bridge to chapter 3's integral convexity), applies the already-proved real-valued conjugacy theorem to the extension, and then must separately argue that the resulting conjugate, restricted back to integer points, is again integer-valued and satisfies the discrete exchange axiom — an argument that needs different treatment depending on whether the original function's domain is bounded or unbounded (an exhaustion argument via restriction to a growing integer interval, invoking chunk 06's proximity theorem to control convergence). Skipping this discreteness argument and treating the real-valued theorem as if it settled the integer case would silently discard exactly the chapter's own point.

Formalization scope

The ground set VVV is a Fintype with DecidableEq. ConvexConjugate (the discrete transform) has domain and codomain both (V → ℤ) → WithTop ℝ, obtained by taking the defining supremum in EReal (a complete lattice, so it is always total) and projecting back via a new FromEReal map — this is what lets the biconjugate f•• typecheck as an equality of functions of the same type as f. ConvexConjugateR (the real-valued transform, used only by the milestone Theorem 8.1) is a separate object with no shared code, per the explicit warning against conflating the two transforms; the two never appear in the same item.

A trivializing formalization of the goal would draft only the real-valued case (Theorem 8.4) as if it were the discrete theorem, or would silently allow WithTop ℝ's subtraction-avoidance convention to change which values are compared; neither is done. Theorem 8.4 itself (the polyhedral conjugacy theorem) is not drafted in this mission at all — it would require a fresh, otherwise-unused polyhedral M-/L-convex-function layer on Rⱽ that no other item here needs (see MODERATION_NOTES.md). The M-/L-separation theorems (8.15, 8.16) and the Fenchel-type duality theorem (8.21) are likewise left for a follow-on mission; contributions building the polyhedral bridge or the separation theorems, which depend on machinery this mission establishes, are welcome.

Selected references

  • K. Murota, Discrete Convex Analysis, SIAM, 2003. DOI: 10.1137/1.9780898718508.
13 thms2 active usersReviewed
Functional AnalysisOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

On the Maximal Monotonicity of Subdifferential Mappings II: Subdifferentials Are Exactly the Maximal Cyclically Monotone Operators, Unique up to an Additive ConstantResearch Paper

Motivation

A differentiable convex function on Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn is determined, up to an additive constant, by its gradient, and a vector field is a gradient of a convex function exactly when it satisfies a monotonicity condition along closed cycles. Convex analysis and optimization need the same statement for nonsmooth and extended-valued functions on infinite-dimensional spaces: the subdifferential replaces the gradient, and the question becomes which multivalued maps from a Banach space to its dual arise as subdifferentials, and how much of the function they determine. The answer underlies the treatment of optimality conditions, variational inequalities and evolution equations governed by subdifferentials, where one works with the operator ∂f\partial f∂f and needs to recover fff from it.

Timeline.

  • 1966: R. T. Rockafellar, Characterization of the subdifferentials of convex functions, Pacific J. Math. 17 (DOI 10.2140/pjm.1966.17.497), studied cyclically monotone operators and stated the characterization of subdifferentials as the maximal cyclically monotone operators (its Theorem 3), together with the maximal monotonicity of subdifferentials (its Theorem 4).
  • 1969: H. Brézis pointed out a gap in the 1966 proofs of maximality and uniqueness: a family of dual vectors xε∗x_\varepsilon^*xε∗​ used in the argument might increase unboundedly in norm as ε→0\varepsilon \to 0ε→0.
  • 1970: Rockafellar, On the maximal monotonicity of subdifferential mappings, Pacific J. Math. 33 (DOI 10.2140/pjm.1970.33.209), repaired the argument for arbitrary real Banach spaces, proving Theorem A (maximal monotonicity of ∂f\partial f∂f) and Theorem B (the characterization treated here).

Setting

Let EEE be a real Banach space with dual E∗E^*E∗, and write ⟨x,x∗⟩\langle x, x^* \rangle⟨x,x∗⟩ for the value of x∗∈E∗x^* \in E^*x∗∈E∗ at x∈Ex \in Ex∈E. A proper convex function on EEE is a function f:E→(−∞,+∞]f : E \to (-\infty, +\infty]f:E→(−∞,+∞], not identically +∞+\infty+∞, with f((1−λ)x+λy)≤(1−λ)f(x)+λf(y)f((1-\lambda)x + \lambda y) \le (1-\lambda)f(x) + \lambda f(y)f((1−λ)x+λy)≤(1−λ)f(x)+λf(y) for all x,y∈Ex, y \in Ex,y∈E and 0<λ<10 < \lambda < 10<λ<1. It is lower semicontinuous (lsc) in the norm topology. Its subdifferential is the multivalued map

∂f(x)={ x∗∈E∗∣f(y)≥f(x)+⟨y−x,x∗⟩  ∀y∈E }.\partial f(x) = \{\, x^* \in E^* \mid f(y) \ge f(x) + \langle y - x, x^* \rangle \ \ \forall y \in E \,\}.∂f(x)={x∗∈E∗∣f(y)≥f(x)+⟨y−x,x∗⟩  ∀y∈E}.

A multivalued map T:E→E∗T : E \to E^*T:E→E∗ is a cyclically monotone operator if

⟨x0−x1,x0∗⟩+⋯+⟨xn−1−xn,xn−1∗⟩+⟨xn−x0,xn∗⟩≥0whenever xi∗∈T(xi), i=0,…,n,\langle x_0 - x_1, x_0^* \rangle + \cdots + \langle x_{n-1} - x_n, x_{n-1}^* \rangle + \langle x_n - x_0, x_n^* \rangle \ge 0 \qquad\text{whenever } x_i^* \in T(x_i),\ i = 0, \dots, n,⟨x0​−x1​,x0∗​⟩+⋯+⟨xn−1​−xn​,xn−1∗​⟩+⟨xn​−x0​,xn∗​⟩≥0whenever xi∗​∈T(xi​), i=0,…,n,

and maximal cyclically monotone if, in addition, its graph {(x,x∗)∣x∗∈T(x)}\{(x, x^*) \mid x^* \in T(x)\}{(x,x∗)∣x∗∈T(x)} is not properly contained in the graph of any other cyclically monotone operator. The conjugate of fff is f∗(x∗)=sup⁡x∈E(⟨x,x∗⟩−f(x))f^*(x^*) = \sup_{x \in E} (\langle x, x^* \rangle - f(x))f∗(x∗)=supx∈E​(⟨x,x∗⟩−f(x)) on E∗E^*E∗, and j(x)=12∥x∥2j(x) = \tfrac12\|x\|^2j(x)=21​∥x∥2. In the Lean development these are ProperConvex, subdiff, IsCyclicallyMonotone, IsMaximalCyclicallyMonotone, conj and halfSqNorm, in the namespace RockafellarMaxMono.Cyclic.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem B (p. 210)

For every multivalued map T:E→E∗T : E \to E^*T:E→E∗ on a real Banach space EEE,

(∃f lsc proper convex with T=∂f)  ⟺  T is maximal cyclically monotone,\bigl(\exists f \text{ lsc proper convex with } T = \partial f\bigr) \iff T \text{ is maximal cyclically monotone},(∃f lsc proper convex with T=∂f)⟺T is maximal cyclically monotone,

and if fff and ggg are lsc proper convex with ∂f=T=∂g\partial f = T = \partial g∂f=T=∂g, then g=f+cg = f + cg=f+c for a real constant ccc. Both halves are one statement.

Milestones, in attack order

  1. (3.7) For a finite continuous convex function fff on a real Banach space, ∂f(x)\partial f(x)∂f(x) is nonempty and weak* compact and f′(x;u)=max⁡{⟨u,x∗⟩∣x∗∈∂f(x)}f'(x;u) = \max\{\langle u, x^* \rangle \mid x^* \in \partial f(x)\}f′(x;u)=max{⟨u,x∗⟩∣x∗∈∂f(x)}.
  2. Finite continuous case (pp. 214–215). For finite continuous convex f,gf, gf,g on a real Banach space, ∂g(x)⊃∂f(x)\partial g(x) \supset \partial f(x)∂g(x)⊃∂f(x) for all xxx implies g=f+constg = f + \mathrm{const}g=f+const.
  3. (3.1) ∂(f+j)(x)=∂f(x)+∂j(x)\partial(f + j)(x) = \partial f(x) + \partial j(x)∂(f+j)(x)=∂f(x)+∂j(x) for lsc proper convex fff.
  4. Proposition 1 x∗∗∈∂f∗(x∗)x^{**} \in \partial f^*(x^*)x∗∗∈∂f∗(x∗) if and only if x∗∗x^{**}x∗∗ is a weak** limit of a bounded net xix_ixi​ with xi∗∈∂f(xi)x_i^* \in \partial f(x_i)xi∗​∈∂f(xi​), xi∗→x∗x_i^* \to x^*xi∗​→x∗ in norm.
  5. (p. 213) (f+j)∗(f + j)^*(f+j)∗ is finite and continuous on E∗E^*E∗.
  6. (p. 211) f∗∗f^{**}f∗∗ restricted to EEE is fff.
  7. (3.6) For lsc proper convex f,gf, gf,g: ∂g(x)⊃∂f(x)\partial g(x) \supset \partial f(x)∂g(x)⊃∂f(x) for all xxx implies g=f+constg = f + \mathrm{const}g=f+const.

Significance

The result. Theorem B gives an intrinsic description of subdifferential maps: an operator is the subdifferential of a closed proper convex function if and only if it satisfies the cycle inequality and cannot be enlarged without violating it. The uniqueness clause says that a closed convex function is recovered from its subdifferential up to a constant, the nonsmooth counterpart of recovering a function from its gradient. Milestone 7 is stronger than uniqueness: a one-sided inclusion ∂f⊆∂g\partial f \subseteq \partial g∂f⊆∂g already forces g=f+cg = f + cg=f+c, and this is what gives maximality.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper, and nothing of it is formalized on the platform. Mathlib has convex functions, continuous duals, biduals and weak-* topologies, but not extended-valued subdifferentials on Banach spaces, conjugate duality in the nonreflexive setting, or monotone operator theory. This mission produces formal statements of the paper's steps, the standard max formula for directional derivatives on a Banach space, and the Fenchel conjugate facts the argument uses, each as a separate target.

Difficulty

In a reflexive space the argument is short, because ∂f∗\partial f^*∂f∗ is the inverse of ∂f\partial f∂f. In a nonreflexive space it is not: ∂f∗\partial f^*∂f∗ maps E∗E^*E∗ into E∗∗E^{**}E∗∗, and points of E∗∗∖EE^{**} \setminus EE∗∗∖E appear. The naive route, transferring the inclusion ∂f⊆∂g\partial f \subseteq \partial g∂f⊆∂g to the conjugates by inverting the maps, breaks down there, and the 1966 argument failed at a related step, where the dual vectors in an approximation could be unbounded. Relating ∂f∗\partial f^*∂f∗ to ∂f\partial f∂f without reflexivity is where the difficulty sits; the boundedness of the approximating nets in Proposition 1 is essential and cannot be dropped. The finite continuous case and the max formula (3.7) are needed on an arbitrary Banach space, including the dual E∗E^*E∗, not only on EEE.

Formalization scope

EEE is a real Banach space (NormedAddCommGroup, NormedSpace ℝ, CompleteSpace); E∗E^*E∗ is StrongDual ℝ E with the operator norm, E∗∗E^{**}E∗∗ is StrongDual ℝ (StrongDual ℝ E), and E↪E∗∗E \hookrightarrow E^{**}E↪E∗∗ is NormedSpace.inclusionInDoubleDual. No reflexivity, inner product or finite dimension is assumed. Explicit readings:

  • Values in (−∞,+∞](-\infty, +\infty](−∞,+∞] are EReal with the requirement f(x)≠−∞f(x) \ne -\inftyf(x)=−∞; convexity is the paper's inequality for 0<λ<10 < \lambda < 10<λ<1 in EReal arithmetic. Lower semicontinuity is in the norm topology.
  • A multivalued map is E → Set (StrongDual ℝ E); T=∂fT = \partial fT=∂f means T(x)=∂f(x)T(x) = \partial f(x)T(x)=∂f(x) for every xxx.
  • The cycle inequality quantifies over all n∈Nn \in \mathbb{N}n∈N and points indexed by Fin (n + 1) with wrap-around addition, so the last term is ⟨xn−x0,xn∗⟩\langle x_n - x_0, x_n^* \rangle⟨xn​−x0​,xn∗​⟩. Maximality is graph inclusion among cyclically monotone operators, not among monotone operators.
  • The uniqueness constant is a real number, never ±∞\pm\infty±∞.
  • "⊃\supset⊃" in (3.6) is non-strict inclusion, and the hypothesis is one-sided.
  • A net is a nonempty directed partially ordered index type with convergence along atTop; weak** convergence is pointwise convergence on E∗E^*E∗; "bounded" is a uniform norm bound.
  • "Finite and continuous" for (f+j)∗(f+j)^*(f+j)∗ means equal everywhere to a continuous real-valued function. The max in (3.7) is IsGreatest, so it is attained; the directional derivative is the limit along λ→0+\lambda \to 0^+λ→0+.
  • The print's "∂(f+j)=∂f(x)+∂j(x)\partial(f + j) = \partial f(x) + \partial j(x)∂(f+j)=∂f(x)+∂j(x)" in (3.1) is read as ∂(f+j)(x)\partial(f+j)(x)∂(f+j)(x).

A formalization that drops lower semicontinuity, allows an extended-real constant, or replaces "maximal cyclically monotone" by "maximal monotone" states a different, and in the first two cases false or trivial, theorem; the statements here keep all three.

The proof reduces Theorem B to milestone 7 through Theorem 1 of Rockafellar (1966) and its Corollary 2, which are not stated in this paper and are not milestones; formal statements of them are welcome as supporting theorems. Contributions of reusable infrastructure are welcome: extended-valued subdifferentials and conjugates on normed spaces, the Fenchel–Moreau identity on EEE, the sum rule with a continuous function, and the max formula for directional derivatives.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar, On the maximal monotonicity of subdifferential mappings, Pacific J. Math. 33 (1970), 209–216. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1970.33.209
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Characterization of the subdifferentials of convex functions, Pacific J. Math. 17 (1966), 497–510. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1966.17.497
  • G. J. Minty, On the monotonicity of the gradient of a convex function, Pacific J. Math. 14 (1964), 243–247. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1964.14.243
  • J.-J. Moreau, Fonctionnelles convexes, mimeographed lecture notes, Collège de France, 1967.
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
13 thms2 active usersReviewed
Discrete GeometryOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: Shuze Chen

Discrete Convex Analysis VI: Quasi M-Convex Functions and the Quasi-Proximity TheoremTextbook

Motivation

Convexity is normally defined additively — a function's value at a mixture is bounded by the mixture of its values — but many of the properties that make convexity useful in optimization (a local minimum is global, level sets are well-behaved) survive under a much weaker, purely ordinal notion: quasi-convexity, which compares function values rather than adding them. A nondecreasing rescaling of a convex function is generally not convex, but it is always quasi-convex — so a theory built only on ordinal comparisons automatically covers every such rescaling for free, at the cost of a more delicate proof architecture (since the algebraic cancellations available to additive convexity are no longer available).

Chapter 6's second half asks exactly how far this idea extends in the discrete setting: does the M-convexity exchange axiom have an ordinal, quasi-convex relaxation that still supports the same strong minimization theory — an optimality criterion, a minimizer-cut lemma, and, most significantly, a proximity theorem with the same explicit distance bound? This mission formalizes the chapter's answer: yes, and the relevant relaxed class, functions satisfying condition (SSQM≠_{\ne}=​), is large enough to include every strictly increasing rescaling of an M-convex function, a class the M-convex theory of chunk 06 alone says nothing about.

Setting

Let VVV be a finite ground set and f:ZV→R∪{+∞}f : \mathbb Z^V \to \mathbb R \cup \{+\infty\}f:ZV→R∪{+∞} with nonempty effective domain. Building on chunk 06's M-convex exchange axiom (M-EXC[Z]), this chapter introduces several ordinal relaxations. fff is weakly quasi M-convex, satisfying (QMw), if for every pair of distinct points x,y∈dom⁡fx, y \in \operatorname{dom} fx,y∈domf there exist uuu in the positive support and vvv in the negative support of x−yx - yx−y with f(x−χu+χv)≤f(x)f(x - \chi_u + \chi_v) \le f(x)f(x−χu​+χv​)≤f(x) or f(y+χu−χv)≤f(y)f(y + \chi_u - \chi_v) \le f(y)f(y+χu​−χv​)≤f(y) — an "or" where (M-EXC[Z]) demands an additive inequality. Two further conditions restrict attention to points of different function value and sharpen the conclusion to a three-way trichotomy (strictly better on one side, or exactly tied on both): (SSQM≠_{\ne}=​) quantifies universally over uuu (as in (M-EXC[Z])), while (SSQM≠,w_{\ne,w}=,w​) quantifies existentially over both uuu and vvv (as in (QMw)). The linear perturbation of fff by p:V→Rp : V \to \mathbb Rp:V→R is f[p](x)=f(x)−⟨p,x⟩f[p](x) = f(x) - \langle p, x \ranglef[p](x)=f(x)−⟨p,x⟩.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.78 (the quasi M-proximity theorem)

Let fff satisfy (SSQM≠_{\ne}=​), n=∣V∣n = |V|n=∣V∣, α\alphaα a positive integer. If xα∈dom⁡fx_\alpha \in \operatorname{dom} fxα​∈domf satisfies f(xα)≤f(xα+α(χv−χu))f(x_\alpha) \le f(x_\alpha + \alpha(\chi_v - \chi_u))f(xα​)≤f(xα​+α(χv​−χu​)) for all u,v∈Vu, v \in Vu,v∈V, then arg⁡min⁡f≠∅\arg\min f \ne \emptysetargminf=∅ and there is x∗∈arg⁡min⁡fx^* \in \arg\min fx∗∈argminf with ∥xα−x∗∥∞≤(n−1)(α−1)\|x_\alpha - x^*\|_\infty \le (n-1)(\alpha - 1)∥xα​−x∗∥∞​≤(n−1)(α−1) — verbatim the same conclusion, and the same exact bound, as chunk 06's Theorem 6.37(1), now established for the strictly larger class satisfying (SSQM≠_{\ne}=​) rather than the M-convex exchange axiom itself.

Milestones: Theorems 6.68(2), 6.76, 6.77

Theorem 6.68(2): fff satisfies (M-EXC[Z]) if and only if every linear perturbation f[p]f[p]f[p] satisfies (QMw) — quantifying exactly how much weaker (QMw) is pointwise, and how the gap closes once quantified over every perturbation. Theorem 6.76 (the quasi M-optimality criterion): the direct analogue of chunk 06's Theorem 6.26 for the quasi-convexity classes — a purely pairwise local check still characterizes global (or, in the (QMw) case, strict unique) optimality. Theorem 6.77 (the quasi M-minimizer cut): chunk 06's Theorem 6.28 continues to hold verbatim when its M-convexity hypothesis is replaced by (SSQM≠_{\ne}=​) — the structural fact the proximity theorem's proof is built from survives the relaxation intact.

Significance

The result itself. The proximity theorem is the result algorithms actually use: a scaling algorithm for minimizing quasi-convex functions of this kind inherits exactly the same correctness guarantee, with exactly the same distance bound, as the M-convex case — this is a genuine broadening of chapter 10's algorithmic reach, not a restatement dressed in weaker hypotheses. Every strictly increasing scalar transformation of an M-convex objective (a common modeling device — re-expressing a cost in utility units, or applying a monotone risk measure) now falls under a proximity theorem, whereas prior to this chapter's relaxation such a transformation would generally destroy M-convexity itself and leave optimization theory silent on the transformed problem.

Formalizing it. No matching item exists on the platform for quasi M-convexity in any of its forms. Formalizing Theorem 6.78 requires first pinning down (SSQM≠_{\ne}=​) exactly (there are six closely related axiom variants in this section of the book, only three of which — (QMw), (SSQM≠_{\ne}=​), (SSQM≠,w_{\ne,w}=,w​) — are needed for this mission's chosen results), and this mission also captures, via Theorem 6.68(2), the precise sense in which these relaxed conditions are strictly weaker than plain M-convexity while remaining tightly connected to it.

Difficulty

The natural first instinct, given how close the quasi-convexity axioms look to (M-EXC[Z]), is to try to prove Theorem 6.78 by directly imitating chunk 06's proof of Theorem 6.37 line by line. This mostly works — the proof structure (fix a target coordinate, build a chain of strictly decreasing values via repeated exchange steps, bound the chain's length using the scaled hypothesis) survives verbatim — but every step that chunk 06's proof took by adding two instances of the exchange inequality together must be replaced by an ordinal argument, since (SSQM≠_{\ne}=​) only ever asserts a disjunction of value comparisons, never an additive inequality relating four function values simultaneously the way (M-EXC[Z])'s f(x)+f(y)≥f(x−χu+χv)+f(y+χu−χv)f(x)+f(y) \ge f(x-\chi_u+\chi_v)+f(y+\chi_u-\chi_v)f(x)+f(y)≥f(x−χu​+χv​)+f(y+χu​−χv​) does. The book's proof handles this by working with strict inequalities and the trichotomy structure of (SSQM≠_{\ne}=​) directly rather than algebraic cancellation — the same overall architecture, but every arithmetic step rebuilt as a case analysis on which disjunct of (SSQM≠_{\ne}=​) fires.

Formalization scope

This mission builds directly on chunk 06's published items (CharVec, SuppPos, SuppNeg, DomZ, MExchangeAxiom, ArgMin), per the platform's textbook convention that a later chapter of the same book imports an earlier one's definitions rather than redrafting them; its own namespace DiscreteConvex.MConvexFunctions.Quasi nests under chunk 06's DiscreteConvex.MConvexFunctions accordingly. Δf(z;v,u) (Eq. (6.2)) is never reified as a separate object; every occurrence is unfolded directly into an f-value comparison, avoiding WithTop ℝ subtraction throughout, consistent with chunk 06's own convention.

A trivializing formalization of the goal would silently strengthen (SSQM≠_{\ne}=​) back to plain M-convexity (making this mission redundant with chunk 06's Theorem 6.37) or loosen the exact bound (n−1)(α−1)(n-1)(\alpha-1)(n−1)(α−1) to an unspecified function of n,αn, \alphan,α; neither is done. Six axiom variants appear in this section of the book ((QM), (SSQM), (QMw), (SSQMw_ww​), (SSQM≠_{\ne}=​), (SSQM≠,w_{\ne,w}=,w​)); only the three actually needed by this mission's four items are drafted, and Theorem 6.68's first part (an implication chain among the other three) is left out — see MODERATION_NOTES.md. Contributions building the polyhedral M-convex-function bridge (§6.11–6.12, Theorems 6.59–6.64), the level-set characterizations (Theorems 6.72, 6.74), or the scaled quasi M-minimizer cut (Theorem 6.79, the direct generalization of Theorem 6.77 drafted here) are welcome.

Selected references

  • K. Murota, Discrete Convex Analysis, SIAM, 2003. DOI: 10.1137/1.9780898718508.
  • M. Avriel, W. E. Diewert, S. Schaible, I. Zang, Generalized Concavity, Plenum Press, 1988.
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Existence of an Equilibrium for a Competitive Economy II: Equilibrium Exists When Every Consumer Can Supply Productive LaborResearch Paper

Motivation

A competitive equilibrium is a list of production plans, consumption plans and prices at which every firm maximizes profit, every consumer maximizes utility within the budget, and no market has excess demand. Whether such prices exist at all is the consistency question behind general equilibrium theory, the welfare theorems, and applied equilibrium models used in policy analysis. Arrow and Debreu gave the first proof of existence for a model with production, private ownership and general convex preferences (Econometrica 22, 1954), using Debreu's existence theorem for abstract economies (PNAS 38, 1952).

Their Theorem I assumes that every consumer initially holds a positive amount of every commodity (Assumption IV.a). The authors call this "clearly unrealistic" (p. 280): a household does not hold every good, and most households own little beyond their labor. Theorem II, the subject of this mission, removes that assumption. It only asks that every consumer be able to supply some type of labor that is always productive of a commodity everyone desires. This is the version of the existence theorem that allows a wage-earner economy.

Timeline. Wald (1935–36) proved existence for special production models. Nash (1950) proved existence of equilibrium points for finite games, and Debreu (1952) extended it to abstract economies, in which each player's feasible set depends on the others' choices. Arrow and Debreu (1954) proved Theorems I and II. McKenzie's independent existence proof was published the same year (Econometrica 22, 1954).

Setting

There are lll commodities, nnn producers and mmm consumers; vectors live in Rl\mathbb R^lRl and x≦yx\leqq yx≦y is componentwise. Producer jjj has a production set YjY_jYj​. Consumer iii has a consumption set XiX_iXi​, a utility uiu_iui​ on XiX_iXi​, an endowment ζi\zeta_iζi​ and profit shares αij\alpha_{ij}αij​. Write Y=∑jYjY=\sum_jY_jY=∑j​Yj​, X=∑iXiX=\sum_iX_iX=∑i​Xi​, ζ=∑iζi\zeta=\sum_i\zeta_iζ=∑i​ζi​, and let P={p≧0, ∑hph=1}P=\{p\geqq0,\ \sum_hp_h=1\}P={p≧0, ∑h​ph​=1} be the price simplex. A competitive equilibrium (x1∗,…,xm∗,y1∗,…,yn∗,p∗)(x_1^*,\dots,x_m^*,y_1^*,\dots,y_n^*,p^*)(x1∗​,…,xm∗​,y1∗​,…,yn∗​,p∗) satisfies four conditions. Each yj∗y_j^*yj∗​ maximizes p∗⋅yjp^*\cdot y_jp∗⋅yj​ on YjY_jYj​. Each xi∗x_i^*xi∗​ maximizes uiu_iui​ on {xi∈Xi:p∗⋅xi≤p∗⋅ζi+∑jαijp∗⋅yj∗}\{x_i\in X_i: p^*\cdot x_i\le p^*\cdot\zeta_i+\sum_j\alpha_{ij}p^*\cdot y_j^*\}{xi​∈Xi​:p∗⋅xi​≤p∗⋅ζi​+∑j​αij​p∗⋅yj∗​}. The price vector satisfies p∗∈Pp^*\in Pp∗∈P. Finally z∗=∑xi∗−∑yj∗−ζ≦0z^*=\sum x_i^*-\sum y_j^*-\zeta\leqq0z∗=∑xi∗​−∑yj∗​−ζ≦0 and p∗⋅z∗=0p^*\cdot z^*=0p∗⋅z∗=0.

The assumptions of Theorem II are as follows. I: production sets are closed, convex and contain 000; Y∩Ω={0}Y\cap\Omega=\{0\}Y∩Ω={0} (no output without input); Y∩(−Y)={0}Y\cap(-Y)=\{0\}Y∩(−Y)={0} (no reversible production). II: each XiX_iXi​ is closed, convex and bounded below. III: uiu_iui​ is continuous, has no satiation point, and satisfies ui(tx+(1−t)x′)>ui(x′)u_i(tx+(1-t)x')>u_i(x')ui​(tx+(1−t)x′)>ui​(x′) whenever ui(x)>ui(x′)u_i(x)>u_i(x')ui​(x)>ui​(x′) and 0<t<10<t<10<t<1. IV.b: shares are nonnegative and sum to one for each firm. Two sets of commodities are defined from the data. The set D\mathcal DD contains the commodities always desired by every consumer: from any xi∈Xix_i\in X_ixi​∈Xi​, adding some positive amount of the commodity stays in XiX_iXi​ and raises uiu_iui​. The set P\mathcal PP contains the types of productive labor: for every y∈Yy\in Yy∈Y, (a) yh≤0y_h\le0yh​≤0, and (b) some y′∈Yy'\in Yy′∈Y satisfies yh′′≥yh′y'_{h'}\ge y_{h'}yh′′​≥yh′​ for all h′≠hh'\ne hh′=h and yh′′′>yh′′y'_{h''}>y_{h''}yh′′′​>yh′′​ for some h′′∈Dh''\in\mathcal Dh′′∈D. The remaining assumptions are:

  • IV′.a: each consumer has some xi∈Xix_i\in X_ixi​∈Xi​ with xi≦ζix_i\leqq\zeta_ixi​≦ζi​ and xhi<ζhix_{hi}<\zeta_{hi}xhi​<ζhi​ for some h∈Ph\in\mathcal Ph∈P;
  • V: some x∈Xx\in Xx∈X and y∈Yy\in Yy∈Y satisfy xh<yh+ζhx_h<y_h+\zeta_hxh​<yh​+ζh​ for every hhh;
  • VI: D≠∅\mathcal D\ne\emptysetD=∅;
  • VII: P≠∅\mathcal P\ne\emptysetP=∅.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem II (§4.5, p. 281)

Assumptions I–III, IV′, V–VII ⟹ ∃ (x∗,y∗,p∗) satisfying Conditions 1–4.\text{Assumptions I–III, IV}',\ \text{V–VII}\ \Longrightarrow\ \exists\,(x^*,y^*,p^*)\ \text{satisfying Conditions 1–4.}Assumptions I–III, IV′, V–VII ⟹ ∃(x∗,y∗,p∗) satisfying Conditions 1–4.

Milestones (§5, pp. 282–287)

They follow the paper's proof. Let π=∣P∣\pi=|\mathcal P|π=∣P∣ and Pε={p∈P:ph≥ε ∀h∈P}P^\varepsilon=\{p\in P: p_h\ge\varepsilon\ \forall h\in\mathcal P\}Pε={p∈P:ph​≥ε ∀h∈P} for 0<ε≤1/(2π)0<\varepsilon\le1/(2\pi)0<ε≤1/(2π). Let EεE^\varepsilonEε be the abstract economy in which consumers maximize utility under budget constraints, producers maximize profit, and a market participant chooses p∈Pεp\in P^\varepsilonp∈Pε to maximize p⋅zp\cdot zp⋅z. The milestones are:

  1. §5.0 (1). On PεP^\varepsilonPε every consumer can spend strictly less than p⋅ζip\cdot\zeta_ip⋅ζi​.
  2. §5.1.1 (5). Equilibrium points of EεE^\varepsilonEε satisfy x∗−y∗≦ζ′x^*-y^*\leqq\zeta'x∗−y∗≦ζ′ for a vector ζ′\zeta'ζ′ independent of ε\varepsilonε.
  3. §5.2.0. The attainable sets relative to ζ′\zeta'ζ′ are bounded.
  4. §5.2.1. The truncated economy E~ε\tilde E^\varepsilonE~ε has an equilibrium point.
  5. §5.2.2 (3)–(5). An equilibrium point of E~ε\tilde E^\varepsilonE~ε is one of EεE^\varepsilonEε.
  6. §5.3.0 (2). If ph∗>εp^*_h>\varepsilonph∗​>ε for all h∈Ph\in\mathcal Ph∈P, the point is a competitive equilibrium.
  7. §5.3.2 (1). Limits of equilibrium points as ε→0\varepsilon\to0ε→0 are quasi-equilibria for consumers.
  8. §5.3.4 (3). If the floors bind, some desired commodity has limit price 000.
  9. §5.3.4 (6). If the floors bind, limit consumption minimizes expenditure over XiX_iXi​.
  10. §5.3.5. For some ε\varepsilonε the floor does not bind.

Significance

Theorem II is the existence theorem for a competitive economy in which consumers may own nothing but their labor. It shows that the survival assumption IV.a can be traded for conditions on labor, desirability and the possibility of an overall excess supply. Section 5.3.3 of the paper also isolates the quasi-equilibrium, in which utility maximization under the budget is replaced by cost minimization at a given utility level. That notion is used in later existence and welfare arguments.

The theorem has been proved since 1954; this mission does not reopen it. The work here is the machine-checked proof. The companion mission on Theorem I formalizes the shared model and Debreu's lemma. As of September 2026 neither theorem has a Lean formalization on the platform, and Mathlib contains no general equilibrium theory.

Difficulty

The obvious approach reuses the proof of Theorem I: build the abstract economy of consumers, producers and a price-choosing participant, and apply Debreu's lemma. That fails at the boundary of the price simplex. Without IV.a, a consumer's cheapest point in XiX_iXi​ can cost as much as the endowment at some prices, so the budget correspondence is not continuous there and the lemma does not apply. The paper therefore keeps prices of productive labor at least ε\varepsilonε and must then show that the floor does not bind for some ε\varepsilonε. That is a limit argument as ε→0\varepsilon\to0ε→0 which uses Assumptions V, VI and VII together, and each of the milestones 7–9 is a step of it. Debreu's lemma itself needs a Kakutani-type fixed point theorem for correspondences, which Mathlib does not provide.

Formalization scope

Commodity vectors are Fin l → ℝ. Consumers are indexed by Fin m and producers by Fin n. The inner product is ⬝ᵥ. The paper's x<yx<yx<y is strict in every component and is written componentwise, never as Lean's < on functions. D\mathcal DD and P\mathcal PP are computed from the economy, not supplied as parameters. Utilities are total functions, but every assumption on uiu_iui​ quantifies over XiX_iXi​ only. "Maximizes" is membership plus an inequality against every feasible alternative; no supremum is used. EEE, EεE^\varepsilonEε and E~ε\tilde E^\varepsilonE~ε are built by one constructor over the players Fin m ⊕ Fin n ⊕ Unit. The vector ζ′\zeta'ζ′ takes the lower bounds ξi\xi_iξi​ of Assumption II as an explicit argument. The milestones of §5.3 are stated for the limit of a sequence of equilibrium points, which is how the paper constructs them. Assumption V is dropped from every milestone except §5.3.5 and the goal. With V, the case assumption of §5.3.1 is contradictory and those milestones would hold vacuously.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out as follows. The assumptions are satisfiable with IV.a failing: a sorry-free check covers two goods, one consumer who owns nothing and can only supply labor, and one firm turning labor into the desired good. The goal therefore does not hold vacuously.

Needed infrastructure includes a Kakutani fixed point theorem or Debreu's lemma, compactness of truncated action sets, and sequential compactness arguments in Rl\mathbb R^lRl. AGT.brouwer_fixed_point is on the platform and can serve as a starting point. The lemma is reusable well beyond this mission. Contributions to any milestone, to the lemma, or to the boundedness results shared with Theorem I are welcome.

Selected references

  • K. J. Arrow and G. Debreu, Existence of an Equilibrium for a Competitive Economy, Econometrica 22(3), 265–290, 1954. https://doi.org/10.2307/1907353
  • G. Debreu, A Social Equilibrium Existence Theorem, Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 38(10), 886–893, 1952. https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.38.10.886
  • L. W. McKenzie, On Equilibrium in Graham's Model of World Trade and Other Competitive Systems, Econometrica 22(2), 147–161, 1954. https://doi.org/10.2307/1907352
  • J. F. Nash, Equilibrium Points in n-Person Games, Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 36(1), 48–49, 1950. https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.36.1.48
16 thms2 active usersReviewed
Discrete GeometryOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: Shuze Chen

Discrete Convex Analysis XVII: Fenchel Duality and Linear-Programming IntegralityTextbook

Motivation

Duality is the organizing principle of convex optimization: a minimization problem's optimal value equals a maximization problem's optimal value, and this coincidence, rather than being a lucky accident, follows from a separating-hyperplane argument that applies whenever the two problems' feasible regions are shaped compatibly enough. Werner Fenchel formalized this in the 1950s for pairs of convex and concave functions related by the Legendre-Fenchel transform, and the resulting Fenchel duality theorem specializes, for linear objectives over polyhedral feasible regions, to linear programming duality — the fact, central to the entire theory of combinatorial optimization, that a linear program's optimal value can always be certified from above and below by a pair of primal and dual feasible solutions. Murota's Discrete Convex Analysis (SIAM, 2003) collects this classical machinery, together with the integrality theory that lets it produce combinatorial (integer-valued) certificates rather than merely real ones, as the technical foundation the rest of the book builds its discrete theory on top of.

Setting

For f:Rn→R∪{+∞}f : \mathbb R^n \to \mathbb R \cup \{+\infty\}f:Rn→R∪{+∞}, the epigraph is epi⁡f={(x,Y):Y≥f(x)}\operatorname{epi} f = \{(x,Y) : Y \ge f(x)\}epif={(x,Y):Y≥f(x)}, and fff is convex iff epi⁡f\operatorname{epi} fepif is a convex set; fff is proper if additionally its effective domain dom⁡f={x:f(x)<+∞}\operatorname{dom} f = \{x : f(x) < +\infty\}domf={x:f(x)<+∞} is nonempty, and closed if epi⁡f\operatorname{epi} fepif is topologically closed. A function h:Rn→R∪{−∞}h : \mathbb R^n \to \mathbb R \cup \{-\infty\}h:Rn→R∪{−∞} is concave, proper, closed analogously via its hypograph. The convex conjugate is f∙(p)=sup⁡x{⟨p,x⟩−f(x)}f^\bullet(p) = \sup_x\{\langle p,x\rangle - f(x)\}f∙(p)=supx​{⟨p,x⟩−f(x)}, and the concave conjugate h∘(p)=inf⁡x{⟨p,x⟩−h(x)}h^\circ(p) = \inf_x\{\langle p,x\rangle - h(x)\}h∘(p)=infx​{⟨p,x⟩−h(x)}. The relative interior ri⁡S\operatorname{ri} SriS of a set SSS is the interior of SSS relative to its affine hull. A function is polyhedral if its epigraph (or hypograph) is a finite intersection of half-spaces. Given an m×nm \times nm×n matrix AAA, b∈Rmb \in \mathbb R^mb∈Rm, c∈Rnc \in \mathbb R^nc∈Rn, the primal and dual linear programs are min⁡{c⊤x:Ax=b, x≥0}\min\{c^\top x : Ax=b,\ x\ge0\}min{c⊤x:Ax=b, x≥0} and max⁡{b⊤y:A⊤y≤c}\max\{b^\top y : A^\top y \le c\}max{b⊤y:A⊤y≤c}, with feasible regions PPP, DDD. A matrix is totally unimodular if every square submatrix has determinant 000, 111, or −1-1−1. A discrete set S⊆ZnS \subseteq \mathbb Z^nS⊆Zn is hole free if S=Sˉ∩ZnS = \bar S \cap \mathbb Z^nS=Sˉ∩Zn, where Sˉ\bar SSˉ is the convex hull of SSS's real embedding; the discrete Minkowski sum is S1+S2={x1+x2:x1∈S1,x2∈S2}S_1+S_2 = \{x_1+x_2 : x_1\in S_1, x_2\in S_2\}S1​+S2​={x1​+x2​:x1​∈S1​,x2​∈S2​}.

Formalization targets

Goal (Theorem 3.6, Fenchel duality). For proper convex fff and proper concave hhh satisfying at least one of four alternative conditions — a relative-interior condition on dom⁡f∩dom⁡h\operatorname{dom} f \cap \operatorname{dom} hdomf∩domh, a polyhedrality condition on the same, or the analogous pair of conditions on dom⁡f∙∩dom⁡h∘\operatorname{dom} f^\bullet \cap \operatorname{dom} h^\circdomf∙∩domh∘ together with closedness of fff, hhh —

inf⁡x{f(x)−h(x)}=sup⁡p{h∘(p)−f∙(p)},\inf_x\{f(x)-h(x)\} = \sup_p\{h^\circ(p)-f^\bullet(p)\},xinf​{f(x)−h(x)}=psup​{h∘(p)−f∙(p)},

with the extremum on the appropriate side attained whenever the common value is finite. This is the mission's capstone: the four alternative hypotheses make it the most broadly applicable statement of the four convex-duality results in this mission, each of the other three being either a special case in substance (Theorem 3.5, separation, which 3.6 is proved from) or a literal specialization to linear data (Theorem 3.10, LP duality).

Supporting milestones. Theorem 3.2 (biconjugation: f∙f^\bulletf∙ is always closed proper convex, and g∙∙=gg^{\bullet\bullet}=gg∙∙=g for closed proper convex ggg); Theorem 3.5 (the separation theorem for convex/concave functions, under two of Theorem 3.6's four hypotheses); Theorem 3.9 (the Farkas lemma, equality form); Theorem 3.10 (LP duality: weak duality, strong duality with attainment, and complementary slackness); Theorem 3.13 (total unimodularity of the constraint matrix guarantees an integral optimal solution whenever an optimal solution exists); Proposition 3.14 (an explicit potential function certifying a minimum-weight bipartite perfect matching, via the totally unimodular incidence-matrix LP); and Proposition 3.16 (for a translation-invariant family of hole-free discrete sets, the property that discrete disjointness implies closure disjointness is equivalent to the discrete Minkowski sum matching the integer points of the closures' Minkowski sum).

Significance

Fenchel duality is the single result from which the separation theorem, LP duality, and (via the totally-unimodular incidence matrix of a bipartite graph) the combinatorial duality underlying weighted bipartite matching all descend, in one unbroken chain of specialization; formalizing this chain in one mission exhibits that structure directly, rather than treating each result as an independent fact. Proposition 3.16 plays a different role: it is the chapter's warning that naive discrete analogues of convexity (hole-freeness) do not automatically inherit convexity's good closure properties under Minkowski sums, which is exactly the gap the book's later M-convexity and L-convexity machinery is built to close — this mission's Proposition 3.16 is therefore the motivating negative result for the rest of the book's positive theory, not a loose end. So far as a platform search shows, no existing formalization matches this chunk's specific combination of extended-valued (possibly ±∞\pm\infty±∞) functions, the four-alternative Fenchel duality hypothesis, or the bipartite-matching-via-total-unimodularity argument; the one related platform result (VectorSpaceOpt.fenchel_duality, from Luenberger) is for real-valued functions on general normed spaces under a single relative-interior-and-solidness hypothesis, a different generality from the extended-valued, four-hypothesis statement here.

Difficulty

The naive approach to Theorem 3.6 tries to prove the duality gap is zero directly from the definitions of the two conjugates, which only gives the easy inequality inf⁡≥sup⁡\inf \ge \supinf≥sup (a one-line computation, shown in the book's own proof in three lines); the substantive content is the reverse inequality, and it genuinely fails without a constraint-qualification hypothesis like (a1)-(b2) — Example 3.8 in the book exhibits a convex/concave pair with inf⁡=0≠−1=sup⁡\inf = 0 \ne -1 = \supinf=0=−1=sup when none of the four conditions hold. The book's actual route reduces Theorem 3.6 to the separation theorem (Theorem 3.5) applied to fff shifted down by the (assumed finite) infimum, which produces the separating affine function directly; this is why Theorem 3.5, although logically a special case in spirit, earns its own milestone rather than being subsumed silently.

Formalization scope

All convex and concave functions are represented uniformly as (V → ℝ) → EReal-valued (Fintype V), rather than mixing WithTop ℝ for convex and WithBot ℝ for concave functions, so that Theorem 3.2's biconjugate — whose properness is a conclusion, not an assumption — has a well-defined codomain without extra casts. Convexity is defined via the epigraph being a convex subset of the ordinary real vector space (V→R)×R(V\to\mathbb R)\times\mathbb R(V→R)×R (Mathlib's Convex ℝ), following the book's own equivalent characterization, rather than unfolding the direct inequality definition, which would require a extended-arithmetic scalar-multiplication convention (0\cdot(+\infty)=0) that Mathlib does not provide for EReal. The relative interior is defined directly from the book's own metric-ball-intersected-with-affine-hull description, since Mathlib has no relative-interior primitive at the pinned revision. Polyhedra are finite intersections of explicit half-spaces. A bipartite perfect matching is represented as a bijection between the two vertex sides restricted to the edge set — a faithful, not narrower, representation since every perfect matching between equal-size parts arises this way. The formalization does not trivialize: Theorem 3.6's four hypotheses are carried in full (not reduced to the easiest single case), and no result is stated only for finite-valued (never ±∞\pm\infty±∞) functions, which would discard the entire point of the extended-value convex-analysis framework this chapter sets up for the rest of the book. Infrastructure needed beyond Mathlib's Convex, Matrix, and EReal API: all epigraph/hypograph, conjugate, relative-interior, and polyhedral apparatus is defined fresh in DiscreteConvex.IntegralConvexityB; a contribution proving any of the seven milestones independently, or supplying Mathlib-quality relative-interior lemmas, would be a natural entry point.

Selected references

  • K. Murota, Discrete Convex Analysis, SIAM, 2003, DOI 10.1137/1.9780898718508, Chapter 3.
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970.
  • A. Schrijver, Theory of Linear and Integer Programming, Wiley, 1986.
37 thms2 active usersReviewed
CombinatoricsDiscrete GeometryOperations Research+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Lifts of Convex Sets and Cone Factorizations II: Antichain and Face-Count Lower Bounds on the Nonnegative Rank of a PolytopeResearch Paper

Motivation

Many polytopes that arise in combinatorial optimization, such as the matching, cut, stable set and travelling salesman polytopes, have exponentially many facets, yet some of them can be written as the linear projection of a polyhedron with far fewer facets. The smallest number of facets of such a lift decides whether the polytope admits a compact linear-programming formulation. Yannakakis (Expressing combinatorial optimization problems by linear programs, J. Comput. System Sci. 43 (1991)) showed that this number equals the nonnegative rank of the polytope's slack matrix, turning a question about formulations into a question about matrix factorizations. Gouveia, Parrilo and Thomas (arXiv:1111.3164v2) extended this correspondence from polytopes and nonnegative orthants to arbitrary convex bodies and closed convex cones.

Exact nonnegative rank is NP-hard to compute (Vavasis, SIAM J. Optim. 20 (2009)), so lower bounds matter. The oldest ones are combinatorial: they see only which entries of the slack matrix are zero. Goemans (Smallest compact formulation for the permutahedron, Math. Program. 153 (2015)) observed that a polytope with nCn_CnC​ faces needs a lift with at least log⁡2nC\log_2 n_Clog2​nC​ facets. Section 4.2 of Gouveia–Parrilo–Thomas recasts these support-based bounds through the face lattice and derives, alongside Goemans' bound, a sharper antichain bound. This mission formalizes that chain of results.

Setting

Write Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn for Euclidean space with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩. A polytope C⊆RnC \subseteq \mathbb{R}^nC⊆Rn is the convex hull of finitely many points; as throughout the paper, the origin is assumed to lie in its interior. The polar of CCC is

C∘={ y∈Rn:⟨x,y⟩≤1 for all x∈C }.C^\circ = \{\, y \in \mathbb{R}^n : \langle x, y\rangle \le 1 \text{ for all } x \in C \,\}.C∘={y∈Rn:⟨x,y⟩≤1 for all x∈C}.

Let ext⁡(C)\operatorname{ext}(C)ext(C) be the set of extreme points of CCC (its vertices). The slack operator SCS_CSC​ is the function SC(x,y)=1−⟨x,y⟩S_C(x, y) = 1 - \langle x, y\rangleSC​(x,y)=1−⟨x,y⟩ on ext⁡(C)×ext⁡(C∘)\operatorname{ext}(C) \times \operatorname{ext}(C^\circ)ext(C)×ext(C∘). The extreme points of C∘C^\circC∘ correspond to the facets of CCC, the facet of yyy being {x∈C:⟨x,y⟩=1}\{x \in C : \langle x, y\rangle = 1\}{x∈C:⟨x,y⟩=1}, so SCS_CSC​ is the canonical vertex–facet slack matrix of CCC and is nonnegative.

An R+k\mathbb{R}^k_+R+k​-factorization of SCS_CSC​ consists of maps A:ext⁡(C)→R+kA : \operatorname{ext}(C) \to \mathbb{R}^k_+A:ext(C)→R+k​ and B:ext⁡(C∘)→R+kB : \operatorname{ext}(C^\circ) \to \mathbb{R}^k_+B:ext(C∘)→R+k​ with SC(x,y)=⟨A(x),B(y)⟩S_C(x, y) = \langle A(x), B(y)\rangleSC​(x,y)=⟨A(x),B(y)⟩. The nonnegative rank rank⁡+(C)\operatorname{rank}_+(C)rank+​(C) is the least such kkk, and +∞+\infty+∞ if there is none.

The support supp⁡(SC)\operatorname{supp}(S_C)supp(SC​) is the 0/10/10/1 matrix with a one where SC(x,y)≠0S_C(x,y) \ne 0SC​(x,y)=0. A Boolean factorization of it of intermediate dimension kkk assigns subsets A(x),B(y)⊆[k]={1,…,k}A(x), B(y) \subseteq [k] = \{1,\dots,k\}A(x),B(y)⊆[k]={1,…,k} with SC(x,y)≠0  ⟺  A(x)∩B(y)≠∅S_C(x,y) \ne 0 \iff A(x) \cap B(y) \ne \emptysetSC​(x,y)=0⟺A(x)∩B(y)=∅; the least such kkk is the Boolean rank.

A face of CCC is the empty set or a set of maximizers in CCC of a linear functional; CCC itself is a face. The face lattice L(C)L(C)L(C) is the set of faces ordered by inclusion, and the Boolean lattice 2[k]2^{[k]}2[k] is the set of subsets of [k][k][k] ordered by inclusion. An embedding φ:L(C)→2[k]\varphi : L(C) \to 2^{[k]}φ:L(C)→2[k] satisfies H⊆F  ⟺  φ(H)⊆φ(F)H \subseteq F \iff \varphi(H) \subseteq \varphi(F)H⊆F⟺φ(H)⊆φ(F).

Formalization targets

Goal: Corollary 4.13 (p. 16)

For a polytope CCC:

(1)rank⁡+(C) ≥ min⁡{k:p≤(k⌊k/2⌋)}\text{(1)}\quad \operatorname{rank}_+(C) \ \ge\ \min\Big\{ k : p \le \tbinom{k}{\lfloor k/2 \rfloor} \Big\}(1)rank+​(C) ≥ min{k:p≤(⌊k/2⌋k​)}

for every antichain of ppp faces of CCC (no face contained in another), and

(2)rank⁡+(C) ≥ log⁡2nC,\text{(2)}\quad \operatorname{rank}_+(C) \ \ge\ \log_2 n_C ,(2)rank+​(C) ≥ log2​nC​,

where nCn_CnC​ is the number of faces of CCC, including ∅\emptyset∅ and CCC.

Milestones

  1. §4.2, p. 15. For a nonnegative matrix MMM, rank⁡B(M)≤rank⁡+(M)\operatorname{rank}_B(M) \le \operatorname{rank}_+(M)rankB​(M)≤rank+​(M): a nonnegative factorization of intermediate dimension kkk yields a Boolean factorization of supp⁡(M)\operatorname{supp}(M)supp(M) of the same dimension.
  2. Theorem 4.11, p. 15. supp⁡(SC)\operatorname{supp}(S_C)supp(SC​) has a Boolean factorization of intermediate dimension kkk if and only if L(C)L(C)L(C) embeds into 2[k]2^{[k]}2[k].
  3. Corollary 4.12, p. 15. rank⁡+(C)≥min⁡{k:L(C) embeds into 2[k]}\operatorname{rank}_+(C) \ge \min\{k : L(C) \text{ embeds into } 2^{[k]}\}rank+​(C)≥min{k:L(C) embeds into 2[k]}.

Significance

Both bounds depend only on the combinatorial type of the polytope. For a square they give rank⁡+≥log⁡210≈3.32\operatorname{rank}_+ \ge \log_2 10 \approx 3.32rank+​≥log2​10≈3.32 and rank⁡+≥4\operatorname{rank}_+ \ge 4rank+​≥4; for a three-dimensional cube log⁡228≈4.81\log_2 28 \approx 4.81log2​28≈4.81 and 666 (p. 16). For the regular nnn-gon, whose slack matrices all have rank 333, the face-count bound gives rank⁡+≥log⁡2n\operatorname{rank}_+ \ge \log_2 nrank+​≥log2​n, which is of the optimal order (Example 4.14). Theorem 4.11 is the statement that the Boolean rank of a slack matrix, also known as its rectangle covering number, is an invariant of the face lattice; the rectangle-covering version is phrased as Theorem 2.9 of Fiorini, Kaibel, Pashkovich and Theis (Combinatorial bounds on nonnegative rank and extended formulations, arXiv:1111.0444), as cited by the paper.

The results are proved in the paper. The formalization provides machine-checked definitions of the polar, the slack operator of a polytope, its nonnegative and Boolean ranks and its face lattice, reusable for later work on extension complexity (for instance, rectangle-covering lower bounds for specific polytopes). No formal proof of these statements is known to exist in Lean or on this platform.

Difficulty

Milestone 1 and the passage from Corollary 4.12 to Corollary 4.13 are short: Sperner's theorem is available in Mathlib as IsAntichain.sperner, and an embedding of L(C)L(C)L(C) into 2[k]2^{[k]}2[k] is injective. The weight lies in Theorem 4.11, which needs facts about polytopes that Mathlib does not state in this form: every vertex is an exposed point, each extreme point of the polar cuts out a face, every face of a polytope is the convex hull of the vertices it contains, and every proper face is the intersection of the facets containing it, with those facets indexed by ext⁡(C∘)\operatorname{ext}(C^\circ)ext(C∘). The last fact is where the origin-in-the-interior assumption and the polar enter, and it fails for faces described by an arbitrary list of inequalities that is not the facet description. A second, smaller difficulty is finiteness: the face-count bound needs the set of faces of a polytope to be finite.

Formalization scope

Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) with the Euclidean inner product. The polar is the one-sided polar above, not Mathlib's absolute polar. A polytope is the convex hull of a Finset with the origin in its interior; n=0n = 0n=0 is allowed (C={0}C = \{0\}C={0}), and all targets hold there. Faces are Mathlib's exposed faces (IsExposed ℝ C F), which include ∅\emptyset∅ and CCC, as the paper's counts do; for a polytope these are all faces. The factorization maps are total functions on Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn constrained only on extreme points. The nonnegative rank is valued in ℕ∞, the infimum of the empty family being +∞+\infty+∞; part (2) of the goal is stated for every finite value of the rank. Part (1) is stated for every antichain of faces, equivalent to the paper's "largest antichain". "Smallest kkk" is sInf of a set of naturals that is nonempty in each case (the set of kkk with p≤(k⌊k/2⌋)p \le \binom{k}{\lfloor k/2\rfloor}p≤(⌊k/2⌋k​), and the set of kkk admitting an embedding of the finite lattice L(C)L(C)L(C)).

The paper says "lattice embedding". Its proof of Theorem 4.11 constructs, and uses, only a map that preserves and reflects inclusion, and φ(F)=⋃v∈FA(v)\varphi(F) = \bigcup_{v \in F} A(v)φ(F)=⋃v∈F​A(v) need not preserve joins or meets; the formalization reads "lattice embedding" as an order embedding (Face C ↪o Finset (Fin k)) throughout.

Trivializing formalizations are ruled out: the rank is not a natural-number infimum (which would be 000 when no factorization exists); faces are not arbitrary subsets of CCC; and an embedding is order-reflecting, not merely monotone (every poset maps monotonically into 2[0]2^{[0]}2[0]).

Welcome contributions: a proof of milestone 1; a library of polytope facts (vertices are exposed points, faces are convex hulls of their vertices, finiteness of the face lattice, facets from the polar), which is reusable well beyond this mission; then Theorem 4.11 and the corollaries.

Selected references

  • J. Gouveia, P. A. Parrilo, R. R. Thomas, Lifts of Convex Sets and Cone Factorizations, Math. Oper. Res. 38(2):248–264, 2013; arXiv:1111.3164v2. https://arxiv.org/abs/1111.3164
  • M. Yannakakis, Expressing combinatorial optimization problems by linear programs, J. Comput. System Sci. 43(3):441–466, 1991. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-0000(91)90024-Y
  • M. X. Goemans, Smallest compact formulation for the permutahedron, Math. Program. 153:5–11, 2015. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-014-0757-1
  • S. Fiorini, V. Kaibel, K. Pashkovich, D. O. Theis, Combinatorial bounds on nonnegative rank and extended formulations, Discrete Math. 313(1):67–83, 2013; arXiv:1111.0444. https://arxiv.org/abs/1111.0444
  • S. A. Vavasis, On the complexity of nonnegative matrix factorization, SIAM J. Optim. 20(3):1364–1377, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1137/070709967
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
PreviousPage 2 of 3Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me